00_RX-V2065_U_cv.

fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 24, 2009 4:10 PM

RX-V2065
RX-V2065
AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL
© 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WS30700

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance
CAUTION with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)
DO NOT OPEN that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
where they exit from the apparatus.
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient manufacturer.
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
persons. or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold
with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
caution when moving the cart/apparatus
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
the literature accompanying the appliance. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
1 Read these instructions. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
2 Keep these instructions. is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
3 Heed all warnings. way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
4 Follow all instructions.
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
5 Do not use this apparatus near water.
operate normally, or has been dropped.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by
not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
granted by the FCC, to use the product. problem by using one of the following measures:
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. the interference.
Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” lead-in to coaxial type cable.
digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
other electronic devices.
contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not
Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.
installed and used according to the instructions found in the users
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
electronic devices.

Caution-i En
 Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean 18 Before moving this unit, press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, set this unit to the standby mode, and disconnect the AC
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least power plug from the wall outlet in the main room.
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
the back of this unit. The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
or transformers to avoid humming sounds. into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from ..... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz (General model)
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with .........................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz (Asia model)
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical sunshine, fire or like.
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto cause hearing loss.
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: WARNING
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
discoloration on the surface of this unit. SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, OR MOISTURE.
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
this unit.
if you turn off this unit by LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
small quantity of power.
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
are complete. To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, wide slot and fully insert.
possibly causing damage. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. ICES-003.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and IMPORTANT
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
during a lightning storm. below.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified MODEL:
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The Serial No.:
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
reference.
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.

Caution-ii En
■ Notes on remote controls and batteries
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following
conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and -).
• Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control narrows
– the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim
• If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the
remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.
• If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries
immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked material. If
the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets
into your eyes or mouth, rinse it away immediately and
consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly
before installing new batteries.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may
shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries to
leak.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may
be different even though they look the same.
• Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote
control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a
case, install new batteries and set the remote control code.
• Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE

Responsible Party: Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A. • This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Address: 6660 Orangethorpe Avenue • Operation is subject to the following conditions:
Buena Park, CA 90620 – This device may not cause harmful interference.
Telephone: 714-522-9105 – This device must accept any interference received including
Fax: 714-670-0108 interference that may cause undesired operation.
Type of Equipment: AV Receiver See the Troubleshooting section at the end of this manual if
Model Name: RX-V2065 interference to radio reception is suspected.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is
often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

Caution-iii En
 Contents
Registering XM Satellite Radio channels................ 37
INTRODUCTION Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™
Features.................................................................... 2 information .......................................................... 38
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning

INTRODUCTION
About this manual................................................... 3
Supplied accessories................................................ 3 (U.S.A. model only)........................................... 39
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 39
Part names and functions....................................... 4 Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
Front panel ................................................................. 4 subscription.......................................................... 39
Rear panel .................................................................. 5 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations...................... 39
Front panel display..................................................... 6 Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels...... 41
Remote control........................................................... 6 Setting the Parental Lock ......................................... 42
Simplified remote control .......................................... 8 Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
Quick start guide..................................................... 9 information .......................................................... 43
L

Using iPod™.......................................................... 44

PREPARATION
PREPARATION Controlling iPod™................................................... 44
Connections ...........................................................10 Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 46
Placing speakers....................................................... 10 Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver
Connecting speakers ................................................ 11 and your Bluetooth component............................ 46
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 46
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14 Using USB storage devices................................... 47
Connecting other components ................................. 16 Playback of the USB storage device........................ 47
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Using PC servers................................................... 48
Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 18 Windows Media Player 11 setup ............................. 48
Connecting to the network ....................................... 19 Playback of PC music contents................................ 48

OPERATION
Connecting a USB storage device ........................... 19 Using the Internet Radio feature......................... 50
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks.................................. 19

BASIC
Listening to Internet Radio ...................................... 50
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 20 Using the Rhapsody® service
Connecting the power cable..................................... 20
Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 20 (U.S.A. model only)........................................... 51
Optimizing the speaker setting for your Account setup for Rhapsody® ................................. 51
Playback of Rhapsody® contents............................. 51
listening room (YPAO) ..................................... 21
Other functions ..................................................... 53
Using Auto Setup..................................................... 21
When an error message is displayed during Selecting the HDMI OUT jack ................................ 53
Using the HDMI™ control function........................ 53
measurement........................................................ 23

OPERATION
ADVANCED
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 53
When a warning message is displayed after
measurement........................................................ 23 ADVANCED OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION Setting the option menu for each input source
Playback.................................................................24 (Option menu)................................................... 54
Basic procedure........................................................ 24 Option menu items................................................... 54
Using the SCENE function ...................................... 24 Selecting a video signal to be output during an
Selecting a source on the GUI screen ...................... 25 audio reproduction............................................... 56
Muting audio output................................................. 25 Operating various settings for this unit

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
Adjusting high/low frequency sounds (Setup menu) ..................................................... 57
(tone control) ....................................................... 25 Basic operation of the Setup menu .......................... 59
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 25 Using multi-zone configuration ........................... 69
Using your headphones............................................ 26 Connecting Zone2/3................................................. 69
Changing information on the front panel display .... 26 Controlling Zone2/3................................................. 71
Enjoying the sound field programs .....................27 Controlling other components with the remote
Selecting sound field programs................................ 27 control................................................................ 72
Enjoying unprocessed input sources Setting remote control codes.................................... 72
(Straight decode mode)........................................ 30 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 72
Enjoying sound field programs without surround Advanced setup..................................................... 73
speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 30
Enjoy sound field programs with headphones APPENDIX
(SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 30
APPENDIX

Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode ............................... 30 Troubleshooting.................................................... 75

FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 31 Glossary ................................................................. 88
Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station Sound field program information ....................... 91
(Frequency tuning) .............................................. 31 Information on HDMI™...................................... 92
Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in Specifications......................................................... 93
(Preset tuning)...................................................... 31 Index ...................................................................... 94
Using HD Radio™ features
(U.S.A. model only) ...........................................33 (at the end of this manual)
Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs ................... 33 Information about software...................................i
Using the iTunes Tagging feature............................ 33 List of remote control codes.................................iii
Displaying HD Radio™ information....................... 34
English

XM® Satellite Radio tuning

(U.S.A. model only) ...........................................35
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 35
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 35
XM Satellite Radio® operations ............................. 36

1 En
INTRODUCTION
Features
■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier ■ Digital audio decoders
• Minimum RMS Output Power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.08% • Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
THD, 8 Ω) • DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution
• FRONT L/R: 130 W + 130 W Audio, DTS Express
• CENTER: 130 W • Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
• SURROUND L/R: 130 W + 130 W • DTS, DTS 96/24 decoder, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES
• SURROUND BACK L/R: 130 W + 130 W Discrete 6.1
• Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic
■ Speaker/Preout outputs IIx decoder
• Speaker terminals (7-channel), extra speaker terminals • DSD decoder
(2-channel for presence or Zone2, 2-channel for • DTS NEO:6 decoder
Zone3), preout jacks (7.1-channel) • Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. model only)
■ Input/Output terminals ■ Radio tuners
Input terminals • HD Radio digital broadcast reception capability (U.S.A.
• HDMI input x 5 (rear x 4, front V-AUX x 1) model only)
• Audio/Visual input • XM Satellite Radio tuning capability, using XM Mini-
Tuner and Home Dock, sold separately (U.S.A. model only)
[Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning capability, using
(optical) x 2, analog input x 3 (rear x 2, front V-AUX
SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately (U.S.A. model only)
x 1)
[Video] Component video x 2, Video x 5 (rear x 4, ■ HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
front V-AUX x 1) • HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-
• Audio input (analog) x 2 definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio.
• Phono input (analog) x 1 – Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
• Multi-channel audio input (7.1-channel) information capability
• DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal – Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth – “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability
wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold – High refresh rate and high resolution video signals
– High definition digital audio format signals capability
separately)
• Analog to analog and HDMI digital video up-
• USB port to connect a USB storage device conversion (video ↔ component video → HDMI)
• NETWORK port to connect a PC or access the Internet capability for monitor out
Radio and Rhapsody® (U.S.A. model only) via LAN • Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video
Output terminals output 480i(576i) or 480p(576p) → 720p, 1080i or 1080p
• Monitor output • HDMI control function supported
[Audio/Video] HDMI x 2 • Dual HDMI output (possible to select individual or
[Video] Component video x 1, Video x 1 simultaneous output)
• Audio/Visual output ■ Automatic speaker setup features
[Audio] Analog x 1 • “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic
[Video] Video x 1 Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker
• Audio output outputs suitable for listening environments.
Digital (optical) x 1, Analog x 1
• Zone2/3 output ■ Other features
Analog x 2 • 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
• GUI (graphic user interface) menus to optimize this unit
Other terminals to suit individual audiovisual system
Remote input x 1, Remote output x 1 • iPod, USB and PC file browsing
Trigger output x 2 • Album art display capability
• Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
■ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the
• Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability
creation of sound fields
• SCENE function for changing input sources and sound
• CINEMA DSP 3D
field programs with one key
• Compressed Music Enhancer mode
• Bi-amplification connection capability
• Virtual CINEMA DSP
• Multi-zone function (Zone2/3)
• SILENT CINEMA • DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
• iTunes Tagging function (U.S.A. model only)

2 En
 About this manual
• Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between
the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of

INTRODUCTION
differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
• For better viewing, we increase the size of characters used in example screen images in this manual. Therefore the size ratio of characters to other
objects (such as icons) may be different from that of the actual display image.
• “LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “dHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the
attached sheet or “Part names and functions” (page 4) for the information about each position of the parts.
• ☞ indicates the page describing the related information.
• y indicates a tip for your operation.

Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by

PREPARATION
Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 &
x.v.Color

OPERATION
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a

BASIC
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-
HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned

OPERATION
ADVANCED
by Neural Audio Corporation.

iPod™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
countries. XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not
available in Alaska and Hawaii.

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
HD Radio™ Technology Manufactured Under License From iBiquity
Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

Rhapsody and the Rhapsody logo are registered trademarks of

RealNetworks, Inc.
This receiver supports network connections.
APPENDIX

Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
• Remote control (page 6) • Optimizer microphone (page 21)
• Simplified remote control (page 8) • AM loop antenna (page 20)
• Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) (page 6) • Indoor FM antenna (page 20)
• Power cable (page 20) • VIDEO AUX input cover (page 19)
English

3 En
 Part names and functions
Front panel

A BC D E F G H I J K

HDMI THROUGH

VOLUME

ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE BAND

ON/OFF ON/OFF CONTROLS INFO l PRESET h MEMORY CATEGORY l TUNING/CH h

SCENE

BD/DVD TV CD RADIO

PROGRAM INPUT
MAIN ZONE
VIDEO AUX
PHONES USB TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF

SILENT CINEMA EFFECT

VIDEO AUDIO HDMI IN

L M N O P Q R S T U V
A ZONE2 ON/OFF N USB port
Switches Zone2 on and off (page 71). For connecting a USB memory device or USB portable audio
B HDMI THROUGH player (page 19)
Lights up in the following cases while this unit is on standby. O TONE CONTROL
• when the HDMI control function is on Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers
• when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently (page 25).
working P PROGRAM selector
C ZONE3 ON/OFF Changes sound field programs (page 27).
Switches Zone3 on and off (page 71). Q STRAIGHT
D ZONE CONTROLS Toggles between the selected sound field program and straight
Selects a zone to control with the main amplifier operations decode mode (page 30).
(page 71). R SCENE
E INFO Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field
Changes information (input, DSP program, audio decoder, etc) programs (page 24).
displayed on the front panel display (page 26). S PURE DIRECT
F PRESET l / h Changes mode to Pure Direct mode (page 25). This key lights up
Selects an FM/AM preset station (page 32) or an XM/SIRIUS when Pure Direct mode is on.
preset channel (pages 37 and 41). T INPUT selector
G MEMORY Selects an input source (page 24).
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (page 32) or XM/ U OPTIMIZER MIC jack
SIRIUS channels as preset channels (pages 37 and 41). For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting
H BAND (CATEGORY) output characteristics of speakers (page 21).
Change the tuner bands between FM and AM. V VIDEO AUX jacks
Select a channel category for a XM/SIRIUS. For connecting a game console, camcorder or digital camera to
I TUNING/CH l / h either the HDMI IN jack or analog AUDIO/VIDEO jacks
Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels. (page 19).
J Front panel display
Displays information on this unit (page 6).
K VOLUME control
Controls the volume of this unit (page 24).
L MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns this unit on and off (page 20).
M PHONES jack
For plugging headphones (page 26).

4 En
 Part names and functions

Rear panel

a b c d e f g

INTRODUCTION
PHONO RS- 232C TRIGGER OUT
1 2 12V NETWORK
0.1A MAX.

SIRIUS XM HDMI OUT 1 HDMI OUT 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4

(HDMI CONTROL) (BD/DVD)

DOCK SP2 SP1

ZONE3 EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE
ANTENNA MONITOR OUT SPEAKERS
SINGLE CLASS 2 WIRING
COMPONENT HD Radio COMPONENT
OUT VIDEO FM GND AM VIDEO
REMOTE

PR

PREPARATION
IN
PR
UNBAL.
OPTICAL
OUT AC IN
DIGITAL
AUDIO PB VIDEO
GND
PB
VIDEO

Y
Y FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
CENTER SINGLE CENTER

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2
( TV ) (CD) AV AUDIO ZONE2 ZONE3
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 OUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 MULTI CH INPUT OUT OUT OUT PRE OUT

OPERATION
BASIC
h b i j k l m n o

a SIRIUS jack f NETWORK port

For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) For connecting to the network (page 19).
(page 39). g SPEAKERS terminals
DOCK terminal For connecting front, center, surround and surround back

OPERATION
For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS- speakers (page 11). Connect the presence speakers (page 11) or

ADVANCED
11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (page 18). the speakers for Zone2/3 (page 70) to EXTRA SP terminals.
XM jack h DIGITAL AUDIO jack
For connecting XM Mini-Tuner in XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock Outputs audio signals from a selected digital audio input source
(sold separately) (page 35). to an external component (page 16).
b PHONO jacks i AV 1-6 jacks
For connecting a turntable (page 16). For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6
GND terminal (page 16).

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
For connecting a turntable to reduce noise in the signal j AV OUT jacks
(page 16). Outputs audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source
c RS-232C terminal to an external component (page 16).
Control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult your k AUDIO 1/2 jacks
dealer for details. For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2
d TRIGGER OUT 1/2 jacks (page 16).
For connecting an external terminal with a trigger input terminal l MULTI CH INPUT jacks
to operate it linked with operation of this unit. Consult your For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output
dealer for details. (page 18).
e HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks m AUDIO OUT jacks
For connecting HDMI-compatible video monitors (page 14). Outputs audio signals from a selected analog input source to an
APPENDIX

HDMI 1-4 jacks external component (page 16).

For connecting external components for HDMI inputs 1-4 ZONE2/3 OUT jacks
(page 16). Output sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a
ANTENNA terminals different zone (page 69).
For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (page 20). n PRE OUT jacks
MONITOR OUT jacks Outputs multi-channel signals from up to 7.1 channels to an
Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as external amplifier (page 18).
a TV (page 14). o AC IN
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting the supplied power cable (page 20).
English

For connecting an external component that supports the remote

control function (page 18).

5 En
 Part names and functions

Front panel display

ab c d e f g h i j k

SIRIUS HD TAG SLEEP VOL.

XM STEREO ZONE ZONE
3 TUNED 2 3 MUTE
OUT 1 OUT 2
PL SW PR
L C R
SL SR
SBL SB SBR

l m l n
a HDMI indicator i ZONE2/ZONE3 indicator
Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is Lights up when Zone2 or Zone3 is turned on.
selected as an input source. j SLEEP indicator
OUT 1/OUT 2 indicators Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (page 53).
The respective indicator lights up when HDMI signals are k MUTE indicator
output from the HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks. Flashes when audio is muted.
b XM indicator VOLUME indicator
Lights up when an XM tuner is selected as an input source. Displays volume levels.
c SIRIUS indicator l Cursor indicators
Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are
source. available for operations.
d HD indicator m Multi information display
Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio reception Displays menu items and settings for the current operation.
band (page 33).
n Speaker indicators
e TAG indicator Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently
Lights up when the selected HR Radio program (or song being output.
played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature (page 33).
f CINEMA DSP indicator Subwoofer Center
Presence L PL SW PR Presence R
Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP
is selected. Front L L C R Front R

g CINEMA DSP 3D indicator Surround L SL SR Surround R

Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated. Surround back L SBL SB SBR Surround back R
h Tuner indicator Surround back
Lights up during receiving radio broadcast signals from an FM/
AM station (page 31).

Remote control
Note
• Before installing batteries or using the remote control, make sure that you read “Notes on remote controls and batteries” in the “Caution” section.

■ Installing batteries ■ Operation range

The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be
a c sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Remote control sensor window
b

a Take off the battery compartment cover.

within 6 m (20 ft)
b Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) 30 30

according to the polarity markings (+ and -) on the

inside of the battery compartment.
c Snap the battery compartment cover back into the
place.

6 En
 Part names and functions

e Tuner keys
a n
MAIN ZONE 2 FM/AM Switches a band between FM and AM.
ZONE 3 TRANSMIT CODE SET
b o (CATEGORY l / h) Select a channel category for XM/
POWER POWER SIRIUS.
c SOURCE SLEEP
p MEMORY Presets radio stations.

INTRODUCTION
HDMI
1 2 3 4 PRESET k / n Selects a preset station.
q
1 2
AV
3 4
TUN./CH k / n Changes FM/AM frequencies or
AUDIO
XM/SIRIUS tuner channels.
d 5 6 1 2
f INFO
HDMI
V-AUX PHONO MULTI DOCK Changes the information shown on the front panel display
USB/NET
(page 26).
TUNER SIRIUS XM

CATEGORY g HDMI OUT

e FM AM
Switches the HDMI OUT jacks to output HDMI signals

PREPARATION
PRESET TUN./CH

f INFO MEMORY (page 53).

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE h SCENE
MUSIC STEREO
r Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field
HDMI OUT STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
g MOVIE programs (page 24).
SCENE
i ON SCREEN
h BD
DVD TV CD RADIO
Displays the GUI screen (page 25).
ON SCREEN OPTION
s
i j Cursors k / n / l / h Select menu items or change
settings.
j ENTER VOLUME
t ENTER Confirms a selected item.

OPERATION
RETURN DISPLAY RETURN Returns to the previous screen or

BASIC
ends the menu display.
TOP POP-UP
u
MENU MENU MUTE
k External component operation keys
v Operate recording, playback etc. of external components
k REC

(page 72).
TAG PRG SELECT
w
USB NET RADIO PC RHAPSODY l Numeric keys
1 2 3 4 x Enter numbers.
l 5 6 7 8 m TV control keys

OPERATION
ADVANCED
9 0 10 ENT
Enables operations of a TV or a projector (page 72).
TV n TRANSMIT
INPUT POWER

m TV VOL TV CH Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.

MUTE
o CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external component operations
(page 72).
p POWER
Switches this unit on and standby (page 20).

INFORMATION
a Remote control signal transmitter

ADDITIONAL
Transmits infrared signals. q SLEEP
Switches the sleep timer operations (page 53).
b Zone selection switch
Switches amplifiers (main, Zone2 or Zone3) to be operated by r Sound selection keys
the remote control (page 71). Selects sound field programs (page 27).
c SOURCE POWER s OPTION
Switches an external component on and off. Displays the Option menu (page 54).
d Input selection keys t VOLUME +/–
Adjust the volume of this unit (page 24).
HDMI 1-4 Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4.
AV 1-6 Selects AV inputs 1 through 6. u DISPLAY
Displays the play information on the video monitor.
AUDIO 1/2 Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2.
When an iPod is connected: Changes the operation mode of the
APPENDIX

V-AUX Selects a signal input from the VIDEO AUX jacks.

iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock (page 44).
PHONO Selects a signal input from the PHONO jacks.
v MUTE
MULTI Selects a signal input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks. Turns the mute function on and off (page 25).
DOCK Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth w HD Radio keys
wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK terminal. TAG Stores “tag” data to the iPod or internal
TUNER Selects the FM/AM tuner. memory of this unit (page 33).
SIRIUS Selects a SiriusConnect tuner as an input source. PRG SELECT Selects an HD Radio audio program
XM Selects an XM tuner as an input source. (page 33).
USB/NET Selects a USB device or a signal input via x Sub-input selection keys
English

network (selected by xSub-input Selects USB, NET RADIO, PC or Rhapsody when “USB/NET”
selection keys).
is selected as the input source.

7 En
 Part names and functions

Simplified remote control

Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit. Keys on the simplified remote control
function as well as the identical keys on the main remote control (page 6).
Note
• Before using the simplified remote control or replacing the battery, make sure that you read “Notes on remote controls and batteries” in the “Caution”
section.

■ Replacing the battery of the simplified

POWER
remote control
SLEEP
Change the battery when the operation range of the
simplified remote control decreases.
SCENE
BD TV CD RADIO
DVD

INPUT

ON SCREEN OPTION VOLUME

ENTER
MUTE
RETURN DISPLAY
Use a straight Replace the Close the
TAG PRG SELECT pin to remove battery with a cover.
PRESET
the cover. new CR2025
battery.

Remove the insulation sheet

y
• To select an input source, press INPUT l / h repeatedly.
• The printings “TAG” and “PRG SELECT” are for U.S.A. model.

■ Setting the controlling zone

Follow the procedure below to select an amplifier (main,
Zone2 or Zone3) to be operated by the simplified remote
control (page 71).
Zone to select Procedure

Main Press and hold h (right of ENTER) and

BD/DVD for more than 3 seconds.

Zone2 Press and hold h (right of ENTER) and TV

for more than 3 seconds.

Zone3 Press and hold h (right of ENTER) and CD

for more than 3 seconds.

■ Setting the remote control ID

Follow the procedure below to set the remote control ID of
the simplified remote control. For details about remote
control ID, see page 74.
Zone to select Procedure

ID1 Press and hold l (left of ENTER) and BD/

DVD for more than 3 seconds.

ID2 Press and hold l (left of ENTER) and TV

for more than 3 seconds.

8 En
 Quick start guide
When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on
operations and settings.

INTRODUCTION
Step 1: Prepare items for setup Step 2: Set up your speakers
Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
necessary for setup. unit.
For example, prepare the following items for setting up a
7.1-channel sound system. • Placing speakers ☞P. 10
• Connecting speakers ☞P. 11
Front right speaker
y

PREPARATION
Video monitor Subwoofer • This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer)
that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic
Front left characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions,
speaker and room acoustics, etc.).
Surround right speaker
You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using
the YPAO technology (☞P. 21).

Step 3: Connect your components

Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components.

OPERATION
Center
speaker • Connecting a TV monitor or projector ☞P. 14
☞P. 16

BASIC
• Connecting other components
Surround Back • Connecting a multi-format player or an
Components right speaker
(such as DVD player) external decoder ☞P. 18
Surround Back
left speaker • Connecting an external amplifier ☞P. 18
• Connecting a USB storage device ☞P. 19
Surround left speaker
• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞P. 18

OPERATION
ADVANCED
Requirements qty. • Connecting to the network ☞P. 19
Speakers Front speaker 2 • Connecting the FM and AM antennas ☞P. 20
• Connecting an XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ☞P. 35
Center speaker 1
• Connecting a SiriusConnect tuner ☞P. 39
Surround speaker 2

Surround back 2 Step 4: Turn on the power

speaker

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
Connect the power cable and turn on this unit.
Active subwoofer 1

Speaker cable 7 • Connecting the power cable ☞P. 20

• Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 20
Subwoofer cable 1

Reproduction component such as DVD player 1

Step 5: Select the input source and start
Video monitor such as TV 1 playback
Video cable or HDMI cable 2 Select the component connected in step 3 as an input
Audio cable 2 source and start playback.
APPENDIX

y • Basic procedure ☞P. 24

• The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: • Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 27
1 Two surround speakers
2 One center speaker
3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s) y
• Video and audio cables are unnecessary if you use HDMI cables. • This unit supports the SCENE function (page 24) that changes the input
source and sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for
different purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select
from a scene from those just by pressing a remote control key.
English

9 En
PREPARATION
Connections
Placing speakers
This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommend the following speaker layout in order to obtain the
optimum surround effect.
7.1-channel speaker layout
Speaker channels
C ■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
FL FR
The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds
(stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at
SW SW an equal distance from the ideal listening position. Adjust
30˚ the height of the TV or screen so that about 1/4 of the
screen from the bottom is aligned with the tweeters of the
front speakers.
SL SR
■ Center speaker (C)
60˚
SL 80˚ SR The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and
SBL SBR right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just
above or just under the center of the TV with the front
30 cm (12 in) or more surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a
screen, place it just under the center of the screen.
6.1-channel speaker layout
■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
C sounds. Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the
FL FR
listening position. To obtain a natural sound flow in the
5.1-channel speaker layout, place them slightly further
SW SW
back than in the 7.1-channel speaker layout.
30˚
■ Surround back left and right speakers (SBL
and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB)
SL SR The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear
60˚ effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the
80˚
SL SR listening position at least 30 cm (1 ft) away from each
other, ideally at the same distance as that between the
SB
front left and right speakers.
In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
5.1-channel speaker layout right channel sound signals are mixed down and output
from the single surround back speaker.
C In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
FL FR right channel sound signals are output from the surround
left and right speakers.
SW SW
■ Subwoofer (SW)
30˚
The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-
frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital
and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in
SL SR amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing
60˚
80˚
Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and
SL SR
right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections
from a wall.

10 En
■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the
front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the
PL PR
sound field programs (page 27). We recommend that you
use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA
1/4 from
DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers, FL bottom FR

INTRODUCTION
connect the speakers to SP1 terminals and then set “Extra 1.8 m 1.8 m
(6 ft) (6 ft)
Speaker Assignment” to “Presence” (page 60).
C

Connecting speakers
Connect your speakers to the respective terminals according to your speaker layout. The following illustration shows how
to connect speakers for 7.1-channel speaker layout.

PREPARATION
y
• You can connect Zone2/3 speakers to the EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2) terminals (page 70).
• You can connect up to two subwoofers. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them.

b a e d k j
k

OPERATION
NETWORK

BASIC
b 3 HDMI 4

a SP1

c SPEAKERS
EXTR
RA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE

e E
SINGLE CLASS 2 WIRING

OPERATION
ADVANCED
i d g
f FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
CENTER SINGLE CENTER

SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2

AUDIO ZONE2 ZONE3
H INPUT OUT OUT OUT PRE OUT

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
g f h i
c

Speakers Jacks on this unit 7.1-channel 6.1-channel 5.1-channel

a Front left FRONT (L) ✔ ✔ ✔
b Front right FRONT (R) ✔ ✔ ✔
c Center CENTER ✔ ✔ ✔
d Surround left SURROUND (L) ✔ ✔ ✔
APPENDIX

e Surround right SURROUND (R) ✔ ✔ ✔

f Surround back left SURROUND BACK (L)
✔ ✔
(Surround back for 6.1-channel) (SINGLE)
g Surround back right SURROUND BACK (R) ✔
h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 ✔ ✔ ✔
i Subwoofer 2 SUBWOOFER 2 Option Option Option
j Presence left SP1 (L) Option Option Option
English

k Presence right SP1 (R) Option Option Option

11 En
Connections

Caution
• A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently
or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit
and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this
unit and the other end to that of your speaker.
• Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or
speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned
on.
• If images on the monitor (CRT) are distorted, place the speakers away from the video monitor.
• Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in the advanced setup menu before
connecting the speakers (page 73). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers when you set “SP IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN”.

■ Connecting speaker cables ■ Using bi-amplification connections

If you do not connect surround back speakers, you can use
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks to make bi-
insulation from the end of each speaker amplification connections to one speaker system which
cable and then twist bare wires of the cable supports bi-amplification connection as shown below.
together so that they will not cause a short To activate the connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in the
circuits. advanced setup menu (page 73).
Front speakers
Right Left
10 mm (0.4 in)

2 Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare

wires into the hole and then tighten the knob.

This unit

2 FRONT SURROUND BACK/

BI-AMP

Red: positive (+)

1 Black: negative (–)
Caution
Before making bi-amplification connections, remove
3 any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for
details.
When not making bi-amplification connections, make
Connecting the banana plug (Except Korea, sure that the brackets or cables are connected before
U.K., Europe, Russia and Asia models) connecting the speaker cables.
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug into
the end of the terminal.
Note
• You cannot use surround back speakers or extra speakers (presence and
Banana plug Zone2 speakers) when bi-amplification connections are made.

12 En
 Connections

Information on jacks and cable plugs

This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are
connecting.

INTRODUCTION
■ Audio jacks ■ Video/audio jacks
Jack and cables Description Jack and cables Description

Analog audio jacks To transmit conventional analog HDMI jacks To transmit digital video and
(white)
stereo audio signals. Use stereo pin digital audio signals. Use HDMI
cables. HDMI cables.
HDMI
L

PREPARATION
R y
• We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI
(red)
cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit
COAXIAL jacks To transmit coaxial digital audio to other DVI components.
signals. Use pin cables. • You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection
(orange)
(page 55).
C
COAXIAL

OPERATION
BASIC
OPTICAL jacks To transmit optical digital audio
signals. Use optical fiber cables.
O
OPTICAL

OPERATION
■

ADVANCED
Video jacks
Jack and cables Description

VIDEO jacks To transmit conventional

VIDEO
composite video signals. Use pin
cables.
V
(yellow)

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
COMPONENT VIDEO To transmit component video
jacks signals that include luminance (Y),
COMPONENT
chrominance blue (PB) and
VIDEO
chrominance red (PR) components.
PR PR
Use component video cables.
(red)

PB PB
(blue)

Y Y
APPENDIX

(green)
English

13 En
 Connections

Connecting a TV monitor or projector

According to the types of video input jacks available on your video monitor (such as a TV or projector), choose one of
the connection methods as shown below. When you connect video players such as a DVD player to this unit with an
HDMI connection, connect your video monitor to this unit with an HDMI connection.
Note
• Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

■ If your video monitor has an HDMI input jack ■ If your video monitor does not have HDMI
input jacks but component video input jacks
TV
TV
a

HDMI Y PB PR

TRIGGER OUT
1 2 12V
0.1A MAX.

TRIGGER OUT
1 2 12V
0.1A MAX.
XM HDMI OUT 1 HDMI OUT 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3
(HDMI CONTROL) (BD/DVD)

HDMI OUT 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

(BD/DVD)

MONITOR OUT
HD Radio COMPONENT
VIDEO
REMOTE
OR OUT
PR IN COMPONENT
VIDEO
REMOTE
UNBAL.
OUT PR IN
PB VIDEO

OUT
PB VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO

b
Projector
Jacks on components Jacks on this unit
Jacks on components Jacks on this unit c Component video output MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
a HDMI input HDMI OUT 1

b HDMI input HDMI OUT 2

■ If your video monitor has neither HDMI nor
y component video input jacks
• This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks. You can select the
active HDMI OUT jack(s) by pressing gHDMI OUT (page 53). TV
• This unit supports the HDMI control function (page 53). If your TV
supports the HDMI control function, connect the TV to the HDMI OUT d
1 jack to control this unit with the remote control of your TV.

TRIGGER OUT
1 2 12V
0.1A MAX.

XM HDMI OUT 1 HDMI OUT 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3

(BD/DVD)

MONITOR OUT
HD Radio COMPONENT
REMOTE

IN

OUT
VIDEO

VIDEO

Jacks on components Jacks on this unit

d Video input (composite) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)

14 En
 Connections

Outputting TV sounds from this unit

To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection
between one of the AV 1-6 jacks of this unit and an audio

INTRODUCTION
output jack of the TV.
If the TV supports an optical digital output, we
recommend that you use the AV 1 jack. Connecting to the
AV 1 jack allows you to switch an input source to the AV 1
jack with a just a single key operation using the SCENE
function (page 24).
TV

PREPARATION
Digital output
(optical)

PR
PR

OPERATION
UNBAL.

PB

BASIC
VIDEO

OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

( TV ) (CD) A
AV
AV 1
A AV 2
A AV 3
A AV 4
A AV 5
A AV 6
A OUT AUDIO1 AUD

OPERATION
ADVANCED
INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
APPENDIX
English

15 En
 Connections

Connecting other components

This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies
from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control.
Note
• Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.

Audio input (PHONO) Audio / video output (AV OUT)

PHONO RS- 232C TRIGGER OUT

1 2 12V
0.1A MAX.

SIRIUS XM HDMI OUT 1 HDMI OUT 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4

(HDMI CONTROL) (BD/DVD)

HDMI input
(HDMI 1-4)
DOCK
ANTENNA MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT HD Radio COMPONENT
OUT VIDEO FM GND AM VIDEO
REMOTE
Audio output PR IN

(DIGITAL AUDIO) PR
UNBAL.
OPTICAL
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO PB VIDEO
GND
PB
VIDEO

Y
Y FRONT

CENTER
GND terminal
Audio output
(AUDIO OUT)

Audio / video input OPTICAL

( TV )
COAXIAL COAXIAL
(CD)
OPTICAL
AV
FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER
AUDIO ZON
MULTI CH INPUT
(AV 1-6) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 OUT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 OUT OU

Audio input (AUDIO 1/2) Multi channel audio input (MULTI CH INPUT)

■ Audio and video player / Set-top box

External Output jacks on
Signal Input jacks on this unit
component components
External component Audio/Video HDMI output HDMI 1 (BD/DVD)
with HDMI output
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
External component Audio Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL
with component video
Video Component video output COMPONENT VIDEO
output
Audio Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL
Video Component video output COMPONENT VIDEO
External component Audio Coaxial digital output AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL
with composite video
Video Composite output VIDEO
output
Audio Optical digital output AV 4 OPTICAL
Video Composite output VIDEO
Audio Analog audio output AV 5 Analog audio
Video Composite output VIDEO
Audio Analog audio output AV 6 Analog audio
Video Composite output VIDEO

16 En
 Connections

y
• Input jacks in parentheses indicate the jacks to which the SCENE function (page 24) is assigned by the initial factory settings. To use the SCENE function
with the initial factory settings, connect external components that support the SCENE function to these jacks.
• You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display as necessary (page 64).
• See page 69 on how to use the ZONE2/3 OUT jacks.

INTRODUCTION
• When you connect an external component with analog audio and component video (or composite) output jacks, connect the analog audio output to the
AUDIO 1 or AUDIO 2 jacks of this unit while making a video connection (component video or composite). Then select the video to be output when
“AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2” is selected as the input source (page 56).

■ Audio player
Output jacks on
External component Input jacks on this unit
components
External component with optical digital Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL
output AV 4 OPTICAL

PREPARATION
External component with coaxial digital Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL
output AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL
External component with analog audio Analog audio output AV 5 Analog audio
output AV 6 Analog audio
AUDIO 1 Analog audio
AUDIO 2 Analog audio

OPERATION
Turntable Analog audio output PHONO Analog audio

BASIC
y
• If your CD player has a coaxial digital output jack, connect it to the AV3 jack of this unit. In this case, you can use the SCENE function (page 24) with the
initial factory settings.
• When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier.
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.

About audio/video output jacks

When using the AV OUT jacks: connect these jacks to composite video and analog audio input jacks of an external

OPERATION
component.

ADVANCED
When using the AUDIO OUT jacks: connect these jacks to analog audio input jacks of an external component.
When using the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL OUT) jack: connect this jack to optical digital input jack of an
external component.

■ Internal signal flow

Video signal flow Audio signal flow

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
This unit automatically converts input video signals and
Notes
outputs the signals to the HDMI OUT jacks and
• Audio signals input to the HDMI input jacks are output from either the
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO) speaker terminals or HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks depending on the “Audio
jacks (video conversion). Output” setting (page 62).
• The DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL OUT) jack outputs digital audio
Note signals only when signals are input to the optical or coaxial optical input
jacks and corresponding input source is selected.
• The AV OUT (composite video) jack only outputs video signals input to
the composite video input jacks. Input Output
HDMI HDMI OUT
Input Output HDMI
HDMI HDMI OUT

HDMI OUT
Optical
APPENDIX

digital
PR PR OPTICAL
OPTICAL

Component Coaxial
PB PB
video digital
COAXIAL

Y Y

VIDEO VIDEO
Composite Analog
video
English

Speaker
MULTI CH INPUT terminals

17 En
 Connections

■ Connecting a multi-format player or an e SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1/2 jack

external decoder Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (Front
■ Transmitting/receiving remote control signals
L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R and
When the components have the capability of the
Subwoofer) for analog multi-channel input from a multi-
transmission of the remote control signals, connect the
format player, external decoder, etc.
REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote
Notes control input and output jack with the monaural analog
• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field mini cable as follows.
processor is automatically disabled.
• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-
channel speaker system when using this feature.
• You can specify a video signal to be output during a multi-channel audio HDMI 1
BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4

reproduction (page 56). If your DVD player has analog multi-channel

output jacks, connect them to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks while making
a video connection (component video or composite).
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
CENTER REMOTE

PR IN

OUT
PB VIDEO

FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER Y

MULTI CH INPUT

Remote Remote
L R L R R L control out control in
Front out

out
Surround

back out
Surround

Subwoofer out

Center out

Infrared signal IR flasher or

receiver or Yamaha Yamaha component
component (CD or DVD player, etc.)

Multi-format player or external decoder y

(7.1-channel output) • If connecting a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE control
signal reception to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can start
playback on the Yamaha component by using the SCENE function
(page 24).
■ Connecting an external amplifier • If connecting a component other than Yamaha products to the REMOTE
If you want to use another amplifier, connect an external OUT jack of this unit, set “SCENE IR” to “OFF” in the advanced setup
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack menu (page 73).
outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding
speaker terminals.
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio
Note
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any
receiver
connections to the speaker terminals.
This unit has the DOCK terminal, to which you can
a b c d connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold
SINGLE CENTER
separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-
10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth
component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK
terminal.
FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2
PRE OUT
e
PHONO RS-232C TRIGGER O

a FRONT PRE OUT jacks 1 2

Front channel output jacks. SIRIUS XM HDMI OUT 1

(HDMI CONTROL)
HDMI OUT 2 HD
(BD

b SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel output jacks. DOCK
ANTENNA

c SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks OUT

COMPONENT
VIDEO
HD Radio
FM GND AM

Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one PR

UNBAL.

external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to OPTICAL

the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.

y
• To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set
“Surround Speaker” to any parameter except “None” (page 60).
d CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack. Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

18 En
 Connections

Connecting to the network Using the VIDEO AUX jacks

To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a Use either the HDMI IN jack or analog AUDIO/VIDEO
network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the jacks on the front panel to connect a game console,

INTRODUCTION
NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into camcorder or digital camera to this unit. Be sure to turn
one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the down the volume of this unit and other components before
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server making connections.
function. To enjoy Internet Radio or music files saved on
Note
your PC, each device must be connected properly in the
• When signals are input to the HDMI IN and analog input jacks (AUDIO
network. L/R and VIDEO) at the same time, the HDMI connection has a priority.

Note

PREPARATION
SCENE

• Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to BD/DVD TV CD RADIO

connect a network hub or router and this unit. INPUT

VIDEO AUX

• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to

STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT OPTIMIZER MIC

configure the network settings manually (page 64). EFFECT

VIDEO AUDIO HDMI IN

Internet
VIDEO L AUDIO R HDMI IN

WAN

OPERATION
Video output

output
Analog audio

HDMI output

BASIC
V L R HDMI
LAN PC
Modem

Router

OPERATION
ADVANCED
Network cable Game console, camcorder
or digital camera
TRIGGER OUT
1 2 12V NETWORK
0.1A MAX.

2 HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 Note
• To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover to
the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks. To remove the
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
REMOTE
cover, push the right section of it.
IN

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
Connecting a USB storage device VOLUME

ORY BAND
CATEG
ORY
l

Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio

TUNIN
G/CH
h

player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. For
information about USB storage devices supported by this
INPUT

OPTIMIZE
R MIC

unit, see page 47. VIDEO

AUX

VIDEO
AUDIO
SCENE
HDMI IN

BD/DVD TV CD RADIO

PROGRAM
MAIN ZONE

PHONES USB TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT

ON/OFF
PUSH Atlach the cover
APPENDIX

SILENT CINEMA EFFECT

VOLUME

ORY BAND
USB CATEG
ORY
l TUNIN
G/CH
h

INPUT

OPTIMIZE
R MIC

VIDEO
AUX

VIDEO
PUSH
AUDIO
HDMI IN
English

USB memory device or

USB portable audio player

Remove the cover

19 En
Connections

Connecting the FM and AM antennas Connecting the power cable

An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are After all connections are complete, plug the supplied
supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to power cable into the AC inlet and then plug it into an AC
the respective jacks. wall outlet.
Indoor FM antenna AM loop
antenna

(HDMI CONTROL) (BD/DVD)

DOCK
ANTENNA MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT AC IN
COMPONENT HD Radio
OUT VIDEO FM GND AM VIDEO
R

PR IN
PR
UNBAL.
OPTICAL
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO PB VIDEO
GND
PB
VIDEO

Y
Y
To the AC wall outlet

Ground (GND terminal)

The GND terminal is for noise reduction.

y
• The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good
reception.
• Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit.
• If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor
Turning this unit on and off
antenna. For details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
• Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is
1 Press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
connected. panel (or pPOWER on the remote control)
Assembling the AM loop antenna to turn on this unit.

2 Press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or

pPOWER) again to turn off this unit
(standby mode).
y
• The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back.
• You can also turn on this unit by pressing RSCENE (or hSCENE).
• This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby
mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall
outlet.

Caution
Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so
may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit
to be saved incorrectly.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You
can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other
to the GND terminal.

Press and hold Insert Release

20 En
 Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the
output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics
of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit.

INTRODUCTION
Caution 2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be to the UOPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not panel.
allow small children to enter the room during the
procedure. INPUT

VIDEO AUX
OPTIMIZER MIC

• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as

PREPARATION
quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is VIDEO AUDIO HDMI IN

in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the

results may not be satisfactory.
y
• You can manually adjust the output characteristics of your speakers
with “Manual Setup” in the Setup menu (page 59).
Optimizer microphone

Using Auto Setup

OPERATION
“MIC ON. View GUI MENU” appears on the front panel

BASIC
1 Check the following points. display.
Before starting the automatic setup, check the The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
following.
Auto Setup
• All speakers and subwoofer are connected Extra Speaker Assignment
properly. Zone2
None
Zone2+Zone3 Presence
EQ Type
• Headphones are disconnected from this unit. Flat Front Natural

OPERATION
ADVANCED
• The video monitor is connected properly.
Start
• This unit and the video monitor are turned on. Move focus
Start
• This unit is selected as the video input source of the
video monitor. y
• The connected subwoofer is turned on and the • You can bring up the above menu screen from the Setup menu (page 59).
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
3 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level

INFORMATION
• The crossover frequency controls of the connected

ADDITIONAL
subwoofer are set to the maximum. surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
CROSSOVER/
VOLUME HIGH CUT

Optimizer microphone

MIN MAX MIN MAX

Subwoofer
APPENDIX

y
• It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when
seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to
the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod.
English

21 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

When measurement is successfully completed,

4 When the speakers are connected to EXTRA
“YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display
SP terminals, press jCursor k repeatedly and the measurement result appears on the GUI
to select “Extra Speaker Assignment” and screen.
then press jCursor l / h to select how to
Auto Setup
use EXTRA SP terminals from “Zone2”, Result

“Zone2+Zone3”, “Presence” or “None”.

If this unit does not work when you press jCursor, Speaker Config : 3 /4 / 0.1
Distance (Min / Max) : 8.0ft / 8.5ft
press iON SCREEN once and then operate this Level (Min / Max) : -3.5dB / +4.5dB
Set Cancel
unit. Finish
Select items

5 To select sound characteristics for

Speaker Config
adjustment, press jCursor n to select “EQ Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in
Type” and then press jCursor l / h. the following order:
If this unit does not work when you press jCursor, Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround
press iON SCREEN once and then operate this Back/Subwoofer
unit.
This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the Distance (Min / Max)
output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer Displays the speaker distance from the listening position
is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on in the following order:
automatically measured speaker characteristics. Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
In “EQ Type”, you can select the following Level (Min / Max)
parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the Displays the speaker output levels in the following order:
desired sound characteristics. Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level
Flat Notes
This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same • If “Error” appears on the GUI screen during “Auto Setup”, measurement
characteristics. Select this if your speakers have is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details, see “When an
error message is displayed during measurement” (page 23).
similar qualities. • If problems occur during measurement, “Check xx warning(s)” (xx
indicates the number of warnings) appears in red. For details, see “When
Front a warning message is displayed after measurement” (page 23).
This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same
characteristics as the front left and right speakers. 7 Press jENTER to confirm the settings.
Select this if your front left and right speakers have To cancel the operation, press jCursor l / h to
significantly better qualities than the other speakers. select “Cancel” and press jENTER.
Natural
This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound. The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to
Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem measurement results.
too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat”. When the following screen appears, remove the
optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now
6 Press jCursor n to select “Start” and then complete.
press jENTER to start the setup procedure.
Auto Setup
A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10 Auto Setup Completed !
seconds. A loud test tone is output during Please disconnect the micorphone
(Then this screen will automatically disappear)
measurement.
Notes
Return
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• Press jCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure. The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it
Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after
results, stay where you will not disturb the measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be
measurement, such as to the side of or behind the subjected to high temperatures such on an AV
speakers or outside the room. component.

y
• If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel”.
• Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of
speakers.

22 En
 Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)

When an error message is displayed

during measurement

INTRODUCTION
If an error is detected during measurement, the
measurement is canceled and “Error” appears on the GUI
screen. Check the error and solve the problem. For details
on each error message, see page 86.

Press jCursor n once, press jCursor l / h

to select “Retry” or “Exit” and then press
jENTER.

PREPARATION
Error
E-1 : No Front Speakers
FrontL/R channel signals are not detected.
Check wiring and connections of the front L/R speakers.

Retry Exit
Move focus

OPERATION
BASIC
Retry
Performs “Auto Setup” again.
Exit
Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup”.
y
• When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To

OPERATION
ADVANCED
continue measurement, select “Proceed”. However, we recommend that
you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again.

When a warning message is displayed

after measurement
If a problem occurs during measurement, “Check xx

INFORMATION
warning(s)” appears on the GUI screen. Check the

ADDITIONAL
warning and solve the problem. For details on each
warning message, see page 87.
Auto Setup
Result

Speaker Config : 3 /4 / 0.1

Distance (Min / Max) : 8.0ft / 8.5ft
Level (Min / Max) : -3.5dB / +4.5dB
Check 2 warnings
Set Cancel
See details
Select items
APPENDIX

y
• Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is
displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto
Setup” again.

1 Press jCursor n / k to select “Check xx

warning(s)” and then press jENTER.
Details of the warning message are displayed. If there
are multiple warning messages, you can display the
next message using jCursor h.
English

2 To return to the top result display, press

jENTER again.

23 En
BASIC OPERATION
Playback
Basic procedure Note
When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some
conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure
1 Turn on external components (TV, DVD that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is
player, etc.) connected to this unit. output, do the following.

2 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press 1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit,
dInput selection key) to select an input only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this
source. unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the
If you press dUSB/NET on the remote control, condition is not improved, the problem may results from the
press xSub-input selection key to select a playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the
sub-input source. playback component.
The name of the selected input source is displayed for 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation
a few seconds. Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu
after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to
Input source name
“DTS” (page 54).
VOL.

AV1 Using the SCENE function

y This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change
• If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT jacks of this input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four
unit, press gHDMI OUT repeatedly to select the active video
monitor(s) (page 53).
scenes are available for different usages, such as playing
• You can also select an input source from the GUI screen (page 25). movies or music. The following input sources and sound
• You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel field programs are provided as the initial factory settings.
display or GUI screen as necessary (page 64).
Keys Input source Sound field program
3 Play the external component that you have
selected as the source input, or select a radio BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight

station on the tuner. TV AV 1 Straight

Refer to the operating instructions of the external CD AV 3 Straight
component for details on playback. For selecting
radio stations or playback of an iPod, Bluetooth RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer
component, USB storage device or network contents y
using this unit, see the following. • When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing
• FM/AM radio tuning (page 31) RSCENE (or hSCENE).
• If you connect a Yamaha DVD/CD player that has the capability of the
• iPod playback (page 44) SCENE control signals to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can
• Bluetooth component playback (page 46) start playback on the player by using the SCENE function.
• USB storage device playback (page 47)
• Internet Radio playback (page 50) Selecting a SCENE
• PC playback (page 48)
• Rhapsody® playback (page 51) Press RSCENE (or hSCENE).
y
4 Turn the KVOLUME control (or press • You can also select a SCENE from the GUI screen (page 25).
tVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume.
Volume
Registering input source/sound field
program to SCENE
VOL.

SW
Select the desired input source/sound field
Volume-18.5dB L C R
SL SR

program and then press and hold RSCENE (or

hSCENE) to edit until “SET Complete” appears
on the front panel display.
y
• If you change the input source setting, register the remote control code of
an external component to the input source (page 72).

24 En
 Playback

Switching remotely controlled external Muting audio output

components linked to scene selections
You can operate an external component with the remote 1 Press vMUTE on the remote control to mute

INTRODUCTION
control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the the audio output.
external component for each input source. Setting remote
control codes for desired input sources allows you to 2 Press vMUTE again to resume audio
switch between external components linked to scene output.
selections.

1 Register the remote control code of an

Adjusting high/low frequency sounds
external component to the desired input
(tone control)

PREPARATION
source (page 72).
You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range
Note
• This feature is not available for TUNER, SIRIUS and XM input
(Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output
sources. from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired
tone.
2 While holding down the desired hSCENE
key, press and hold the dInput selection 1 Press OTONE CONTROL on the front panel
key to which you registered a remote control repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

OPERATION
code in step 1.

BASIC
From now on the external component can be remotely
controllable just by selecting a scene. Treble 0.0dB
Selecting a source on the GUI screen 2 Rotate the PPROGRAM selector to adjust
the frequency range.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

OPERATION
ADVANCED
1 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control. The display returns to the previous screen
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. automatically in few seconds.
Select Scene Note
• The tone control settings are not effective when this unit is in the Pure
Direct mode or “MULTI CH” is selected as an input source.
BD/DVD TV CD RADIO

INFORMATION
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound

ADDITIONAL
Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
2 Use jCursor k / n repeatedly to switch the sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is
page and jCursor l / h repeatedly to activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the
select the desired source. least circuitry.

Category Source Press SPURE DIRECT (or rPURE DIRECT)

Select Scene BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.
SPURE DIRECT lights up when you set Pure Direct
Select Input HDMI1-4, V-AUX, PHONO, MULTI CH,
mode on.
APPENDIX

DOCK, AV1-6, AUDIO1/2, USB, NET

RADIO, PC, Rhapsody, TUNER, SIRIUS, XM The following features are disabled in the Pure Direct
mode.
y – sound field program, tone control
• If an input source you want to select is available in “Select Scene”, you
can select the desired input source and sound field program at once. – display and operation of the Option menu and Setup
menu
3 Press jENTER. – multi-zone function
y
• The font panel display automatically turns off while this unit in the Pure
English

Direct mode.

25 En
 Playback

Input source Information

Using your headphones
iPod (DOCK) (menu (on play information display)
browse mode) DSP Program, Audio Decoder,
Plug your headphones in the MPHONES jack on
USB (USB/NET) Song, Artist, Album
the front panel.
PC (USB/NET)
When you select a sound field program while using the (on GUI screen)
headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT List
CINEMA mode.
Rhapsody (USB/NET) (on play information screen)
Notes DSP Program, Audio Decoder,
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker Song, Artist (or Artist / Channel if
terminals. channel name is available), Album
• When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are
divided to left and right channels. When “MULTI CH” is selected as the
input source, only front L/R sounds are output from the headphones. (on GUI screen)
List

Changing information on the front NET RADIO (USB/NET) (on play information display)
DSP Program, Audio Decoder,
panel display Station Name

Press EINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly.

(on GUI screen)
Available information differs depending on the selected
List
input source.
For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP
Program”, the following screen appears on the front panel Note
• Information marked with “*” is not available when analog HD Radio
display. station is selected.

Input source

Straight
Sound field program

Input source Information

HDMI1-4 Input
AV1-6 DSP Program
AUDIO1/2 Audio Decoder
V-AUX
PHONO
iPod (DOCK) (simple
remote mode)
BLUETOOTH (DOCK)

MULTI CH Input

TUNER Frequency, DSP Program, Audio

Decoder

(for HD Radio information)

Call Sign*, Category*, Artist /
Song*, Album*, Tag Info, DSP
Program, Audio Decoder, Frequency

SIRIUS Channel, Category, Artist / Song,

Composer, Antenna, DSP Program,
Audio Decoder

XM Channel, Category, Artist / Song,

Antenna, DSP Program, Audio
Decoder

26 En
 Enjoying the sound field programs
This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds
for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders.

INTRODUCTION
Selecting sound field programs
■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel
Rotate the PPROGRAM selector to select a desired sound field program.
■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control
Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs.
Sound field programs for movies/TV programs............................... Press rMOVIE repeatedly.

PREPARATION
Sound field programs for music ....................................................... Press rMUSIC repeatedly.
Stereo reproduction .......................................................................... Press rSTEREO repeatedly.
Multi-channel stereo reproduction ................................................... Press rSTEREO repeatedly.
Compressed music enhancer ............................................................ Press rSTEREO repeatedly.
Surround decoder ............................................................................. Press rSUR.DECODE repeatedly.
For example, if you select “Sci-Fi”, the following screen appears on the front panel display.

Sound field program category

OPERATION
BASIC
Sci-Fi
Program name

Notes
• Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input
source is applied again.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
• When you play back DTS Express sources or audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (page 30) is
automatically selected.
• When you play back Dolby TrueHD sources with CINEMA DSP, another program may be automatically selected in specific cases.
• When you play back DTS-HD sources with CINEMA DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.

Sound field program descriptions

This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select
a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
y
• You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (page 6).
• Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 65.
• in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP (page 91).

For movie/TV program sources (MOVIE)

Program Descriptions

Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic
positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an
APPENDIX

ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.

Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent
dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.

Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-
featuring movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.

Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.
English

The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to
the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio
channels and the clarity of the sound.

27 En
 Enjoying the sound field programs

Program Descriptions

Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to
musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones
and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue
the listener even after long hours of viewing.

Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a
good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to
create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.

Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live
feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center
while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence
in the stadium.

Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data
that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling
by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.

Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for
movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during
play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.

For audio music sources (MUSIC)

Program Descriptions

Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the
interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,
creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna.
Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very
full, rich sound.

Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant
reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field
features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.

The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor
can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener
can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals
and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a
big live hall.

For stereo reproduction (STEREO)

Program Descriptions

2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.

y
• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers.

28 En
 Enjoying the sound field programs

For multi-channel stereo reproduction (STEREO)

Program Descriptions

INTRODUCTION
7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit
downmixes the source to 2 channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

Compressed Music Enhancer (ENHANCER)

Program Descriptions

PREPARATION
Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel
compression artifacts.

7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.

Surround decode mode (SUR. DECODE)

Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels.

OPERATION
Decoder Descriptions

BASIC
Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources.

PLIIx Movie / Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as
PLII Movie follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected

PLIIx Music / Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as

OPERATION
ADVANCED
PLII Music follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected

PLIIx Game / Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as
PLII Game follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music.

Neural Sur. Neural Surround processing for any sources.

(U.S.A. model only) The Neural Surround decoder supports PCM (sampling rate of 96 kHz or lower), Dolby Digital, DTS Digital
Surround (except for DTS 96/24), DSD and analog 2-channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible
signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight
into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM
signals are reproduced in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround
program of XM Satellite Radio.
APPENDIX

y
• An input source is played back in straight decode mode (page 30) when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source.
English

29 En
 Enjoying the sound field programs

Enjoying unprocessed input sources Enjoy sound field programs with

(Straight decode mode) headphones (SILENT CINEMA™)
In straight decode mode, sounds are reproduced without SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode
from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel is automatically selected when you connect the headphone
input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate plug to the PHONES jack.
channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced
Note
without a sound field effect.
• SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions.
– 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected.
1 To enable straight decode mode, press – Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is selected.
QSTRAIGHT (or rSTRAIGHT).
“Straight” appears on the front panel display. Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode
2 To cancel straight decode mode, press CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and
accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.
QSTRAIGHT (or rSTRAIGHT) again.
To use this unit in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, presence
A sound field program name appears on the front
speakers are required. Connect the presence speakers to
panel display, and sound is reproduced with that
the SP1 terminals, perform the following settings and then
sound field effect.
select a CINEMA DSP related sound field program.
• Disconnect the headphones from the PHONES jack.
Enjoying sound field programs without • Set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence”
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA (page 60).
DSP) • Set “3D DSP” to “On” (page 66).
When the sound field program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound mode, the 3D indicator on the front panel display lights
field surround effects even without any surround speakers up.
by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy
Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
When “Surround Speaker” in the Setup menu is set to
“None” (page 60), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA
DSP mode.
Note
• Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available in the following conditions even if
you set “Surround Speaker” to “None” (page 60).
– headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack.
– 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected.
– Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is used.

30 En
 FM/AM tuning
The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two
modes for tuning.
4 To tune in by direct frequency tuning, press
lNumeric keys to enter the frequency of

INTRODUCTION
■ Frequency tuning mode the station.
You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set
or specifying its frequency. the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889”.
■ Preset tuning mode Notes
You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by • When you press lNumeric keys during preset tuning, a
registering them to specific numbers, and later just select preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to frequency tuning
those numbers to tune in. mode using ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n)
prior to the operation.

PREPARATION
• “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you
Note enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the
• Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception. entered frequency is correct.

Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station Registering FM/AM stations and

(Frequency tuning) tuning in (Preset tuning)
You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset).
1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input Registering stations by automatic station

OPERATION
source. preset

BASIC
2 Press HBAND (or eFM or eAM) to select a The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong
band. signals and registers up to 40 stations. To register AM
stations, use manual station preset.
3 Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH (U.S.A. model only)
k / n) to specify the frequency. You can register up to 40 FM HD Radio, AM HD Radio

OPERATION
ADVANCED
The TUNED indicator on the front panel display and analog FM radio stations with strong signals.
lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The
Note
STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being
• (U.S.A. model only)
broadcasted is in stereo. If you register an FM HD Radio station with this feature, only the main
audio program of the station (HD1) will be stored. To store other audio
STEREO
TUNED
program, preset the station manually.

FM92.5MHz 1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
The frequency changes in the following manner according dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
to how you press ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./ source.
CH k / n).
When you press the key more than 1 second
2 Press sOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed
The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is
(page 54).
detectable around the current frequency. This is effective
when the tuner can receive strong signals without any 3 Select “Auto Preset” and then press
interference. Once the search starts, release the key.
jENTER.
When you keep holding the key, the search continues even
APPENDIX

when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to

tune in to a specific station.
When you press and release the key Auto Preset
The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps. Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later
Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong from the lowest frequency upwards.
signals and stations are skipped during the search.
y
• You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the
Option menu (page 55).
English

• (U.S.A. model only)

When tuning in to an HD Radio station, the HD indicator lights up. See
page 33 for details about the HD Radio features.

31 En
FM/AM tuning

y
• You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by 4 Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
pressing ePRESET k / n or jCursor k / n while “READY” When registration is complete, the display returns to
is displayed on the front panel display.
• To cancel registration, press jRETURN. the original state.
Status y
• To cancel registration, press jRETURN or leave this unit
without any operations for about 30 seconds.

Calling a preset station (Preset tuning)

01:FM87.5MHz You can call preset stations registered by automatic station
Preset number Frequency preset or manual station preset.
During the automatic station preset, “MEMORY”
appears in the front panel display each time a station Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to
is registered. select a preset number.
When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears y
and then the display returns to the Option menu. • Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped.
• “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed if no stations are
To return the display to the original state, press registered.
sOPTION. • You can directly select a preset number by pressing lNumeric keys
while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if you
Registering stations by manual station enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong Num.”
appears if you enter an invalid number.
preset • When you press lNumeric keys during normal tuning, a frequency
is entered. Set tuning mode to preset tuning mode using FPRESET l
You can manually register FM stations with weak signals / h (or ePRESET k / n) prior to the operation.
or AM stations. • (U.S.A. model only)
This unit may take a little time to call a sub-audio program of an HD
Radio station.
1 Tune in to the desired station (page 31).
y
Clearing preset stations
• (U.S.A. model only)
To register a sub-audio program of the HD Radio station (HD2 to
HD8), press wPRG SELECT to select the desired audio
1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
program. dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
“Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display, 2 Press sOPTION on the remote control.
followed soon by the preset number to which the The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed
station will be registered. (page 54).
y
• By holding down GMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than 3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Clear Preset”
2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically
register the selected station to an empty preset number (next to the and then press jENTER.
lastly-registered preset number).

3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)

to select the preset number to which the 01:FM92.5MHz
station will be registered.
When you select a preset number to which no station Preset number
is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a
preset number to which any station has been already y
• To cancel the operation and return to the Option menu, press
registered, the frequency of the station is displayed. jRETURN.
Frequency to be registered
4 Press jCursor k / n to select a preset
number to reset and then press jENTER.
The preset station registered to the selected preset
01:Empty number is cleared. To clear the registration of
multiple preset numbers, repeat step 4.
Flashes
Preset
number 5 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

y
• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric
keys.

32 En
 Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio technology is a new technology that enables FM and AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally.
Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services.

INTRODUCTION
Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a
single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio technology, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”.
This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM
stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names,
program types, and comments) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).
Notes
• The tuning method for HD Radio stations are same as analog FM/AM radio stations; however, you only tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio
station while this unit is in the monaural tuning mode (page 55).

PREPARATION
• This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive all-digital FM
station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, enter the frequency of the desired all-digital FM HD Radio station directly by
using the lNumeric keys (page 31).

■ Behavior of the display

Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs This unit automatically shows the HD Radio information
(call sign, etc) on the front panel display after 3 seconds.
The HD indicator lights up in the front panel display when
You can switch HD Radio information to be displayed
this unit is tuned into an HD Radio reception band. In this
(page 34).
state, you can select the desired audio program if the

OPERATION
selected FM HD Radio station provides multiple audio

BASIC
HD

programs (up to 8).

■ When multiple audio programs are provided
WXYZ-FM
Audio program Audio program
number (relative/total) Lights up number (absolute) Using the iTunes Tagging feature
HD

This unit is equipped with the iTunes Tagging feature that

OPERATION
ADVANCED
FM 88.9MHz1 enables HD Radio listeners to “tag” songs for subsequent
preview and purchase on iTunes. For details on the iTunes
Press wPRG SELECT b / a on the remote Tagging feature, visit “http://www.hdradio.com/”.
control repeatedly to select the desired audio 1 Tune into an HD Radio station and select HD
program. Radio audio program (if available).
y If the selected HD Radio program (or song being

INFORMATION
• You can also select audio program using lNumeric keys(1-8) and

ADDITIONAL
lENT when this unit is in the automatic or manual tuning mode. In
played) supports the iTunes Tagging feature, the TAG
case you select an audio program currently not available, “HDx Off” (“x” indicator lights up in the front panel display and
indicates the program number) appears. “TAG” appears on the GUI screen.
Notes Lights up
• When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator
disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is automatically HD TAG

selected after approximately 20 seconds. TUNED

• Some audio programs may not contain data programs depending on the
broadcasting station and the time period. WXYZ-FM
■ When only one audio program is provided
If this unit is tuned into an FM HD Radio station including 2 While a song you want to tag is being played
APPENDIX

only one audio program or an AM HD Radio station, you back, press wTAG on the remote control.
cannot select audio programs. If a song is tagged, “StorageSuccess” and the number
Lights up of stored iTunes Tagging information files (up to 50)
appear in the front panel display.
HD

Notes
FM 87.5MHz • “Insufficient Data’ appears in the front panel display and GUI
screen if tagging is not available.
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel
display or the GUI screen, see “iTunes Tagging” (page 80).
English

33 En
 Using HD Radio™ features (U.S.A. model only)

y
• This unit transmits the “tag” data to the iPod if an iPod that
supports iTunes Tagging feature is stationed in the Yamaha iPod
universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit. Otherwise, this unit stores the “tag” data (up Audio Decoder
to 50) in the internal memory and will transmit it next time your
iPod is stationed. Current audio decoder (page 29), frequency, audio
program number (absolute)
Displaying HD Radio™ information
Use this feature to display the HD Radio information in
the front panel display or on the GUI screen. Frequency

Note Frequency, audio program number (absolute), audio

• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display program number (relative/total)
or GUI screen, see “HD Radio Reception” (page 79).

■ Front panel display

Back to “Call Sign”
Press EINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle the
following HD Radio information display modes. Display example (Call Sign)

Call Sign HD

Call sign, frequency, audio program number (absolute) WXYZ-FM

■ GUI screen
Category
Press uDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
Program category, frequency, audio program number on or off the information display.
(absolute) The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.

STEREO
d
Artist / Song TAG

e
Artist name, song title, frequency, audio program a Preset no. 10: WXYZ-FM HD 1/3
number (absolute) f
b TUNED FM 88.9MHz-1 g
Ch Name Classic Rock
Frankie Zipper
c Category
Artist Road to India
Song Made-to-order
Album Input Tuner Option Menu
DSP Straight Enhancer Data Hold
Album title, frequency, audio program number
(absolute)
a Preset number, call sign, audio program number
(relative/total)
b HD Radio icon, TUNED icon
Tag Info c Program category, artist name, song title, album
title
The number of iTunes Tagging information files stored d STEREO icon
in the internal memory, frequency, audio program
e TAG icon
number (absolute)
f Frequency indication gauge
g Band, frequency, audio program
y
DSP Program • To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it
is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.
Current sound field program (page 27), frequency, audio
program number (absolute)

34 En
 XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)
Listening to Satellite Radio
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your

INTRODUCTION
satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii).
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B,
Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play
games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment,
comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources.
Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to
follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a

PREPARATION
variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your
XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular
programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at
this time. Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for
children.
To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346).
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US).

OPERATION
SIRIUS XM Radio Legal

BASIC
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other
marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold
separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold
separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to
change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make
available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio
Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock Note
• If “CHECK ANTENNA”, “CHECK XM TUNER” or “NO SIGNAL”
Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home appears on the front panel display, the connection and setting of the
antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be
Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of correct.
this unit. For details, see the operating instructions
provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock. Activating XM Satellite Radio

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
PHONO RS
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,
inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-
SIRIUS XM HDMI OUT
(HDMI CONTROL) Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio
system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to
DOCK
ANTENNA
subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There
COMPONENT HD Radio
OUT VIDEO FM
are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID:
on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package,
and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the
following eight squares for reference.
APPENDIX

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock Note

(sold separately)
• The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate
your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://
y activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346). You
• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to
Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15
window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM
or outdoors. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or
English

Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the
on the GUI screen (page 38) to check the antenna reception level and full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.
adjust the orientation of the antenna.

35 En
 XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

■ Category Search mode

XM Satellite Radio® operations
1 Press HCATEGORY (or eCATEGORY l /
1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press h) to select the channel category.
dXM) to select “XM” as the input source. “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during
The XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel the channel category selection. When you select the
number, channel name, category, artist name, or song category, the first channel in the category is selected.
title) for the currently selected channel appears on the Category
search mode The first channel in the category
front panel display and GUI screen (page 38).
Search mode XM

XM Pop
001Preview Category name

Channel number Channel name Note

• If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode
y returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search).
• When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically
recalls the previously selected channel. 2 While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel
display, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or
Note
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a
display or on the GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 80). channel within the selected channel
category.
2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes. y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).
“All Channel Search mode” on this page.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category Note
• This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel
Search mode” on this page. Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is
• To select the desired channel directly by entering not malfunction of this unit):
the channel number, see “Direct number access” on – the channel is out of service.
– you do not subscribe to the channel.
this page.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see ■ Direct number access
“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)”
(page 37). In the All Channel Search mode or Category
search mode, press the lNumeric keys to
y
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front enter the desired three-digit channel number.
panel display or on the GUI screen (page 38). For example, to enter the number 123, press the
• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (page 37).
lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”.
■ All Channel Search mode y
• To display the Radio ID number displayed on the front panel display,
Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / select channel “0”.
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric
n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input
channels. number.
• Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you
XM
can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel
number.

00880's • If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or
two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel
number.
y • If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.
• You can search for a channel quickly by holding down For details, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 80).
ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing
HCATEGORY (or eCATEGORY l / h).

36 En
 XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

Registering XM Satellite Radio Calling a preset channel (Preset Search

mode)
channels
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

INTRODUCTION
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
mode, you must preset XM channels. For details, see
Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel
“Registering preset channels” on this page.
easily by selecting the preset channel as described in
Preset channel number
“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this
page. XM

Registering preset channels

00880's
1

PREPARATION
Search a channel you want to set as a preset
channel in one of the XM Satellite Radio Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
search modes. repeatedly to change the preset channel number
For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations” (1 to 40).
(page 36). y
• You can directly select a preset number by pressing a lNumeric key
XM while calling a preset channel.

00880's Clearing preset channels

OPERATION
You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite

BASIC
2 Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY). Radio channels.
The indicator on the front panel display changes as
follows. 1 Press sOPTION on the remote control.
Currently registered channel number The Option menu for “XM” is displayed.
(or “---” if empty)
2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select
XM
“Clear Preset” and then press jENTER.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
P01:---<<008 3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset
Preset number to which new Channel number to be
channel number is registered registered
station number that you want to clear.

y XM

• By holding down GMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than

2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically
register the selected channel to an empty preset number (next to the
008 80's

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
lastly-registered preset number).
• To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN. 4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of
the selected preset channel.
3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,
to select the stored preset station number.
repeat steps 3 and 4.
y
• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric
keys.
5 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
• If you select a preset number being used (currently registered
channel number appears next to the preset number), the current
preset channel will be overwritten.

4 Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

APPENDIX
English

37 En
 XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)

■ GUI screen
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™
information Press uDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
on or off the information display.
Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio information The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.
on the front panel display or on the GUI screen.
Note d
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display
or GUI screen, see “XM Satellite Radio” (page 80).

■ Front panel display a Ch 008

Press EINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle b All Channel Search

Ch Name 80’s
the following XM Satellite Radio information c Category
Artist
Decades
Sanumemo
Song Road to India
display modes.
Input XM Option Menu
DSP Straight Enhancer Hold Data
Channel
Channel number, channel name a Channel number
b Search mode (page 36)
c Channel name, channel category, artist name,
song title
Category
d Antenna reception level
Channel category, channel number y
• To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it
is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen.

Artist / Song
Artist name, song title, channel number

Antenna
Antenna reception level, channel number

DSP Program
Current sound field program (page 27), channel number

Audio Decoder
Current audio decoder (page 29), channel number

Back to “Channel”

Display example (Antenna)

XM

Antenna
y
• You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front
Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 63).
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be
recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space.
• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.

38 En
 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner Displaying the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner

INTRODUCTION
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the
SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see 1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input
tuner.
source.
SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna
(sold separately)
2 Press l0 and then lENT to display the
PHONO Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.

PREPARATION
“000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx”
SIRIUS

(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of

your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the
DOCK

OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
front panel display.
DC
5V
AN
T

Write the Sirius ID below.

ID:________________________________________

To the AC wall outlet

3 Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate

OPERATION
y your subscription.

BASIC
• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the
antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window
with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information
the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction Contact for activation
manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.
• Use the “Antenna” information in the front panel or “SIRIUS Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
Information” screen on the GUI screen (page 43) to check the antenna
reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. y

OPERATION
ADVANCED
• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. • Status messages appear on the front panel display or GUI screen
during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”
Notes (page 81). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED”
• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on the front appears.
panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is
incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner
and the antenna.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations
• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this unit does
not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.
1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ dSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
subscription
The SIRIUS indicator lights up on the front panel
Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To (such as channel number, channel name, category,
activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is artist name, or song title) for the currently selected
uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is channel appears on the front panel display.
12-digit number and it appears on the package of the Search mode
SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect
SIRIUS
tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
APPENDIX

channel “0” (see below).

184Weather
Channel number Channel name

y
• When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

Notes
• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only
English

select “184” or “000”.

• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel
display or on the GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio”
(page 81).

39 En
 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

2 Search for a channel by using one of the Note

SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. • This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel
Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see not malfunction of this unit):
“All Channel Search mode” on this page. – the channel is locked (page 42).
– the channel is out of service.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category – you do not subscribe to the channel.
Search mode” on this page.
• To select the desired channel directly by entering ■ Direct number access
the channel number, see “Direct number access” on
In the All Channel Search mode or Category
this page.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see search mode, press the lNumeric keys to
“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” enter the desired three-digit channel number.
(page 41). For example, to enter the number 123, press the
lNumeric keys as “1”, “2” and “3”.
y
• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the y
front panel display or on the GUI screen (page 43). • To display the Sirius ID number displayed on the front panel display,
• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL select channel “0”.
SIRIUS” (on the front panel display) and “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the lNumeric
TO SUBSCRIBE” (on the GUI screen) appear. keys on the remote control and then press lENT to confirm the input
• You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (page 41). number.
• Instead of pressing lENT to tune into the channel immediately, you
■ All Channel Search mode can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel
number.
Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / • If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or
two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel
n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all number.
channels. • If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears on the front panel
display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the
SIRIUS lNumeric keys or press lENT to cancel (page 42).
• If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.
For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 81).
001Hits1
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by holding down
ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing
HCATEGORY (or eCATEGORY l / h).

■ Category Search mode

1 Press HCATEGORY (or eCATEGORY l /

h) to select the channel category.
“CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during
channel category selection. When you select the
category, the first channel in the category is selected.
Category
search mode The first channel in the category

SIRIUS

Pop
Category name

Note
• If you do not operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode
returns to “ALL” (All Channel Search).

2 While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel

display, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or
eTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a
channel within the selected channel
category.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
ITUNING/CH l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).

40 En
 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ Calling a preset channel (Preset Search

mode)
channels
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

INTRODUCTION
You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite
mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see
Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel
“Registering preset channels” on this page.
easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as
described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search SIRIUS

mode)” on this page.

Registering preset channels
001Hits1
Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
1

PREPARATION
Search a channel you want to set as a preset repeatedly to change the preset channel number
channel in one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio (1 to 40).
search modes.
For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations” Clearing preset channels
(page 39). You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite
SIRIUS Radio channels.

001Hits1 1 Press sOPTION on the remote control.

OPERATION
The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed.

BASIC
2 Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select
The indicator on the front panel display changes as
“Clear Preset” and then press jENTER.
follows.
Currently registered channel number 3 Press jCursor k / n to select the preset
(or “---” if empty)
station number that you want to clear.
SIRIUS

OPERATION
ADVANCED
SIRIUS

P01:---<<001 001 Hits 1

Preset number to which new Channel number to be
channel number is registered registered
4 Press jENTER to execute the clearing of
y
• By holding down GMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than the selected preset channel.
2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,
register the selected channel to an empty preset number (next to the

INFORMATION
repeat steps 3 and 4.

ADDITIONAL
lastly-registered preset number).
• To cancel the preset operation, press jRETURN.
5 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
3 Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
to select the stored preset station number.
y
• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric
keys.
• If you select a preset number being used (currently registered
channel number appears next to the preset number), the current
preset channel will be overwritten.

4 Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).

APPENDIX
English

41 En
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

Setting the Parental Lock 6 Press jCursor l / h to select the category

of a channel you want to lock.
You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access
to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit Parental Lock
automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is Category
Pop
Channel
001 SIRIUS Hits 1
002 The Blend
in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode 003 SIRIUS XM Love
and you search a channel by pressing ITUNING/CH 004
005
40s on 4
50s on 5
l / h (or eTUN./CH k / n).
Input SIRIUS Select Cat / Ch
DSP 7ch Enhancer Lock / Unlock
Setting the code number and the locking
channels 7 Press jCursor k / n to select a channel you
Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number want to lock.
(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.
Notes
• You can also select a channel by using eCATEGORY l / h or
1 Press sOPTION on the remote control. eTUN./CH k / n.
The Option menu for “SIRIUS” is displayed. • While the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen is displayed,
sound of the selected channel is output even the channel is locked.
2 Press jCursor k / n repeatedly to select
8 Press jENTER to lock the selected
“Parental Lock” and then press jENTER.
channel.
3 Use jCursor l / h (to select a digit to edit) A check mark appears next to the locked channel on
and jCursor k / n (to select a number) to the GUI screen. You can toggle channel lock and
unlock as you press jENTER.
enter the desired 4-digit code number.
If you have entered a code number before, enter the
Parental Lock
same code number. Category Channel
Pop 006 ’60s Vibrations
007 Totally ’70s
008 Big ’80s
Parental Lock 009 The Pulse
Enter New PIN 010 The Bridge 9

0000
Input
SIRIUS Select Cat / Ch
DSP 7ch Enhancer Lock / Unlock

Input SIRIUS Edit 9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to lock all the

DSP 7ch Enhancer Set
desired channels.
The entered code number is needed for tuning in the
channel or unlocking the channel. Write it down below.
10 Press jRETURN repeatedly to exit the
Code number: ________________________________ “Parental Lock” screen.
This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in
the “Parental Lock” screen. If the channel is locked,
4 Press jENTER. this unit is tuned into “184 Weather/Emergency” or
The confirmation screen appears. “000 Sirius ID”.
5 Press jENTER again to confirm the code Tuning into the locked channels
number.
Tune into the channel with direct number access (page 40)
“OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel or Preset Search mode (page 41). When you tune into the
list appears. locked channel, “LOCKED” appears on the front panel
Note display and GUI screen, followed by the following
• If a code number is already registered and you enter the different message. Enter the set Parental lock code by using the
number, “Wrong” appears and the screen returns to step 3. Enter lNumeric keys. To cancel this operation, press
the correct code number.
• If you forget the Parental lock code or want to change it, reset it lENT.
using “SR PIN” (page 73). SIRIUS

PIN:
Note
• If an incorrect number is entered, “Wrong” appears on the front panel
display or the GUI screen and this unit is tuned into the previously
selected channel.

42 En
 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)

Display example (Antenna)

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite SIRIUS

Radio™ information
Antenna

INTRODUCTION
Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information on the front panel display or on the GUI y
screen. • You can configure the scroll setting of the front panel display with “Front
Panel Display Scroll” in the Setup menu (page 63).
Note • If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display space.
or GUI screen, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (page 81). • When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals,
“ACQUIRING” appears on the front panel display.
■ Front panel display • When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.

PREPARATION
Press EINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to toggle ■ GUI screen
the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
Press uDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
display modes.
on or off the information display.
Channel The following information is displayed on the GUI screen.
Channel number, channel name
d

OPERATION
BASIC
Category a Ch 001

Channel category, channel number b All Channel Search

Ch Name SIRIUS Hits 1
Category Pop
c Artist
Song
Sanumemo
Road to India
Composer Frankie Zipper
Input SIRIUS Option Menu
Artist/Song DSP Straight Enhancer Hold Data

OPERATION
ADVANCED
Artist name, song title, channel number
a Channel number
b Search mode (page 40)
c Channel name, channel category, artist name,
Composer song title, composer name
d Antenna reception level
Composer name, channel number
y

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
• To hold or release the displayed information, press jENTER. While it
is held, the “HOLD” icon appears on the GUI screen..

Antenna
Antenna reception level, channel number

DSP Program
Current sound field program (page 27)
APPENDIX

Audio Decoder
Current audio decoder (page 29)

Back to “Channel”
English

43 En
 Using iPod™
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (page 18), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied
remote control or the menu displayed on the GUI screen. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this
unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 29).
Notes
• iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using
the YDS-11.
y
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see “iPod” (page 83).
• (U.S.A. model only)
Once the connection between an iPod that supports iTunes Tagging feature and this unit is complete, this unit transmits iTunes Tagging information to the
iPod (page 33).

Controlling iPod™ Controlling iPod in menu browse mode

You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod You can browse song or video files stored on your iPod
universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The using the GUI screen. You cannot directly control your
operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the iPod in this mode.
video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple y
• “_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display.
remote mode).
When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform 1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
the following operations with the remote control. dDOCK) to select “iPod” (DOCK) as the
Key Function input source.
ENTER Subsequent menu 2 Press uDISPLAY on the remote control.
k Menu up
iPod
j n Menu down
Music
Videos
l Previous menu

h Subsequent menu
Input DOCK
Play (Menu browse mode) DSP
STRAIGHT
p
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)

s Stop 3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Music” or

“Videos” and then press jCursor h.
Pause (Menu browse mode)
e • Select “Music” to browse music files.
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
k • Select “Videos” to browse video files.
w Search backward (Press and hold)
Note
f Search forward (Press and hold) • The “Videos” menu does not appear unless the both your iPod and
Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature.
b Skip backward

a Skip forward 4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a

menu item and then press jENTER to start
Switch between Menu browse mode and
u DISPLAY playback.
Simple remote mode

Controlling iPod in simple remote mode

You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip,
etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying
the menu on the GUI screen. You can also directly control
your iPod in this mode.

44 En
 Using iPod™

■ Play information display

a
b

INTRODUCTION
c

d 01:04
Song Made-to-order
–02:27

e Artist Frankie Zipper

Album Road to India
Input DOCK
DSP Straight

PREPARATION
a Shuffle and repeat icons
b (playback), (pausing), (search forward) and
(search backward)
c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)
d Elapsed time, progress bar, remaining time
e Song title, artist name, album title
y

OPERATION
• You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by
pressing EINFO (or fINFO).

BASIC
• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.

■ Shuffle/repeat playback
When controlling iPod in simple remote mode, operate the
iPod directly to set the shuffle and repeat playback.

1 Press uDISPLAY to switch to menu browse

OPERATION
ADVANCED
mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input
source.

2 Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for “iPod” is displayed (page 54).

3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or

“Repeat”, press jENTER and then press

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
jCursor l / h to select the desired
playback style.
Shuffle:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
random order.
• Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order.
• Select “Albums” to play back albums in random
order.
Repeat:
APPENDIX

• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back

repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each song.
• Select “All” to repeat all songs.

4 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

English

45 En
 Using Bluetooth™ components
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of
this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without
wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component.
Note
• This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see “Bluetooth™” (page 83).

About “Pairing”
Pairing (registration of the Bluetooth devices) must be performed when making Bluetooth connections between the
Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth components for the first time. Once pairing is complete,
you can select one of the Bluetooth components to connect to the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver for playback.
y
• Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver YBA-10 can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. If ninth pairing data is registered, the pairing
data for the component least recently used is cleared.

Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio 5 Make sure the Bluetooth component
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver and your Bluetooth
receiver.
component If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
y wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA”
• If the pairing data has been cleared from the Bluetooth wireless audio (example) appears in the Bluetooth device list.
receiver or your Bluetooth component, you need to perform pairing
again.
• For details on operations on your Bluetooth component, refer to the
6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
operating instruction of it. in the Bluetooth device list, and enter a pass
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for key “0000” into the Bluetooth component.
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on
and fully understand all the instructions before starting. the front panel display.

Playback of the Bluetooth™

1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press component
dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)
as the input source.
1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)
to pair with and set it to pairing mode. as the input source.

3 Press sOPTION on the remote control. 2 Press sOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “BLUETOOTH” is displayed
(page 54).
3 Press jCursor n to select “Connect” and
then press jENTER.
Option Menu The Bluetooth connection is established between the
Volume Trim Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth
Connect
Pairing component connected last time.
y
• If the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver cannot find the Bluetooth
BLUETOOTH
Input
component connected last time, “Not found” appears on the front
DSP 7ch Enhancer

panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the
4 Press jCursor n to select “Pairing” and Bluetooth component currently connected, select “Disconnect” and
then press jENTER or perform a disconnect operation on the
then press jENTER. Bluetooth component.
“Searching” appears and the pairing operation starts. • To make a connection between the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
and another Bluetooth component (already paired), perform a
y connect operation on the Bluetooth component while no Bluetooth
• To cancel pairing, press jRETURN. connection is established on the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
• You can also start pairing operation by holding down
GMEMORY on the front panel. 4 Start playback of the Bluetooth component.

5 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

46 En
 Using USB storage devices
You can enjoy playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA , MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files stored on your USB
memory device or USB portable player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. This unit supports USB

INTRODUCTION
mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs).
Notes
• You can play back only the files stored in the first partition.
• Some files may not be playable depending on models and types of USB storage devices.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84).

■ Play information display

Playback of the USB storage device
a

PREPARATION
1 Connect your USB storage device to the b
NUSB port on the front panel (page 19). c

2 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

d 00:30
dUSB/NET and then xUSB) to select Song Made-to-order
e Artist Frankie Zipper
Album Road to India
“USB” as the input source. Input USB Option Menu
DSP 7ch Enhancer

OPERATION
USB

BASIC
Road to India
Symphony 01 a Shuffle and repeat icons
Symphony 02
Symphony 03 b (playback)
Take–Hero
c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)
Input
USB Option Menu d Elapsed time
7ch Enhancer
e Song title, artist name, album title
DSP

If you have connected the USB storage device to this

y
unit before, playback of the music file played at the • You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by

OPERATION
ADVANCED
last time automatically starts. pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).
• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.
3 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a
music file to play back. Shuffle/repeat playback
• To select a file or folder, press jCursor k / n. y
• To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or • These settings are also reflected in playback of PC and Rhapsody®
contents.
jENTER.

INFORMATION
• To return to the previous menu, press jCursor 1

ADDITIONAL
Press sOPTION on the remote control
l. while “USB” is selected as the input source.
The Option menu for “USB” is displayed (page 54).
4 Press jENTER to start playback.
You can also perform the following operations with 2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or
the remote control. “Repeat”, press jENTER and then press
Key Function jCursor l / h to select the desired
playback style.
p Play

s Stop Shuffle:
k • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
APPENDIX

a Skip forward during playback random order.

b Skip backward during playback • Select “On” to play back music files in random
order.
Repeat:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back
repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each music file.
• Select “All” to repeat all music files in the folder.
English

3 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

47 En
 Using PC servers
You can enjoy playback of audio files stored on PCs connected to this unit via your network. To play back audio files on
your PC, you need to install Windows Media Player 11 on the PC and configure the media sharing setting of Windows
Media Player 11.
Note
• If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the network parameters (IP address, etc) of this unit manually (page 64)

Windows Media Player 11 setup 3 Press jENTER to start playback.

You can also perform the following operations with
the remote control.
1 Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media Key Function
Player 11 from the Microsoft website, or use the
p Play
upgrade function of the installed Microsoft Windows
Media Player. s Stop
k
a Skip forward during playback
2 Turn on your PC then allow media sharing.
Activate Windows Media Player 11 first, enable the b Skip backward during playback
media sharing and then select this unit as a device to
■ Play information display
which the media is shared.
Note a
• If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista, Windows b
Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some products).
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software, c
firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In
such cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• You can connect this unit to up to 16 PC servers, and each server must be d 00:13
Song Made-to-order
connected to the same subnet as this unit. e Artist Frankie Zipper
Album Road to India
Input PC Option Menu

Playback of PC music contents DSP 7ch Enhancer

y a Shuffle and repeat icons

• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel
display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84). b (playback)
c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)
1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press d Elapsed time
dUSB/NET and then xPC) to select “PC” e Song title, artist name, album title
as the input source. y
• You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by
PC pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).
PC_SERVER01
• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.
PC_SERVER02

Input
PC Option Menu
DSP 7ch Enhancer

2 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a PC

server and music file to play back.
• To select a PC server, folder or file, press
jCursor k / n.
• To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or
jENTER.
• To return to the previous menu, press jCursor
l.
y
• To update the PC server list displayed in the GUI screen, press
sOPTION, press jCursor k / n to select “Refresh” and then
press jENTER. To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

48 En
 Using PC servers

Shuffle/repeat playback
y
• These settings are also reflected in playback of USB and
Rhapsody® contents.

INTRODUCTION
1 Press sOPTION on the remote control
while “PC” is selected as the input source.
The Option menu for “PC” is displayed (page 54).

2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or

“Repeat”, press jENTER and then press
jCursor l / h to select the desired

PREPARATION
playback style.
Shuffle:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
random order.
• Select “On” to play back music files in random
order.
Repeat:

OPERATION
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back

BASIC
repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each music file.
• Select “All” to repeat all music files in the folder.

3 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
APPENDIX
English

49 En
 Using the Internet Radio feature
You can listen to Internet Radio stations using the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly customized
for this unit, providing a database of over 2000 radio stations. Also, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks.
Note
• To use this feature, your network must be connected to the Internet.
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly recommended
(i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.
• If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the network parameters (IP address, etc) of this unit manually (page 64)
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings
appropriately.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played
■ Play information display
Listening to Internet Radio
y a
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel
display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84).

1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press b 1.fm 80s Euro

dUSB/NET and then xNET RADIO) to

select “NET RADIO” as the input source.

NET RADIO

Bookmarks
Input NET RADIO Option Menu
Locations DSP 7ch Enhancer Bookmark
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
Input
NET RADIO Option Menu
a (playback)
DSP 7ch Enhancer b Station name
y
2 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select an • You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by
item to play back. pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).
• To select an item, press jCursor k / n.
• To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or Storing your favorite Internet Radio
jENTER. stations with bookmarks
• To return to the previous menu, press jCursor
l. 1 Select the desired Internet Radio station.

3 Press jENTER to start playback. 2 Press eMEMORY.

You can also perform the following operations with The selected Internet Radio station is added to the
the remote control. “Bookmarks” list in “NET RADIO” .
Key Function y
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” list, select the station under
p Play “Bookmarks” and then press eMEMORY.
k • You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations on this unit by
s Stop accessing the website with the web browser on your PC. To use this
feature, you need the vTuner ID of this unit (page 65) and your e-mail
address to create your personal account. For details, refer to the help
information on the website. URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/

50 En
 Using the Rhapsody® service (U.S.A. model only)

Prohibition
It is strictly prohibited to modify, reproduce, reverse-engineer or use this unit and/or built-in software for use other

INTRODUCTION
than audiovisual purposes.

The Rhapsody® service is the power behind the Rhapsody® Media Player (the Rhapsody® player software that you can
download to your computer). Rhapsody® service supplies the music, keeps My Library up to date, provides you with
Rhapsody® channels, the Playlist Central online community, and manages your downloads. Your software connects to
Rhapsody® service through the internet. Because your account information and Rhapsody® content are on servers
instead of any individual computer, your music is infinitely portable. Much of what you see in the Display area comes
from Rhapsody® service. What you can do with Rhapsody® service depends on your subscription. You can use

PREPARATION
Rhapsody® service for free, or get even more from a paid membership. The Rhapsody® service also brings you
Rhapsody® Online, a streamlined, internet version of Rhapsody® that you can access from almost anywhere. Just sign in
to your Rhapsody® account to start letting the Rhapsody® service work for you.
For more information, http://www.rhapsody.com/

Account setup for Rhapsody® 4 Press jENTER.

When you select “Rhapsody” for the first time, the Playback of Rhapsody® contents

OPERATION
account setup screen appears. Set up your Rhapsody®

BASIC
account to start using the Rhapsody® service on this unit. y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel
y display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84).
• You can view the account information or edit your Rhapsody® account
later with “Rhapsody Information” in the Setup menu (page 65). 1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel
display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 84).
dUSB/NET and then xRHAPSODY) to
select “Rhapsody” as the input source.
1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

OPERATION
ADVANCED
dUSB/NET and then xRHAPSODY) to Rhapsody

select “Rhapsody” as the input source. Rhapsody Music Guide

Rhapsody Channels
Search
My Library
2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Sign In to
your account” and then press jENTER. Input
Rhapsody Option Menu
DSP 7ch Enhancer
Rhapsody
y

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
From Rock, Pop, Cuntry, Jazz, Classical • If the remaining term of your free trial account is less than seven
- you name it-
Rhapsody lets you listen to it all. days, the number of remaining days is displayed in the GUI screen.
Choose from millions of songs, tune into ad
free digital music channels and so much more. To proceed to step 2 (with the free trial service), press jENTER.
Sign In to your account
To sign up for Rhapsody®, see “Rhapsody Information” (page 65).
Start Free 30-day trial
2 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select an
item to play back.
y
• To subscribe to the Rhapsody® service using 30-day free trial, • To select an item, folder or file, press jCursor k
select “Start Free 30-day trial” in step 2 and then read the / n.
description on the GUI screen. If you accept the terms and
conditions, select “Yes” to get started. In this case, you do not need • To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or
to follow steps 3 and 4. jENTER.
APPENDIX

• To return to the previous menu, press jCursor

3 Use jCursor k / n / l / h and jENTER to
l.
enter your user name and password (up to 64
characters each) and then select “OK” . Rhapsody Music Select a track from the lists organized by
Guide category (artist, album, etc).
Rhapsody User Name
Rhapsody Channels Select a network radio channel from the lists
of the channels provided by Rhapsody®.

Search Use the software keyboard to search the

desired item (artist, album, etc) by keyword.
English

Enter a string up to 64 characters My Library Select a track from items (artist, album, etc)
“Please wait” appears followed by the confirmation added to “My Library” .
screen.

51 En
 Using the Rhapsody® service (U.S.A. model only)

3 Press jENTER to start playback. 2 Press kPOP-UP MENU.

You can also perform the following operations with the
remote control.
Key Function

p Play

s Stop (pause for “Rhapsody Channels” )

00:15 04:23
Title Made-to-order
Pause (unavailable for “Rhapsody Pop-up menu Add Album to My Library
Artist Frankie Zipper
e Add Track to MyAlbum
LibraryRoad to India
k Channels”) Input Rhapsody Option Menu
DSP 7ch Enhancer
Pop-Up Menu

a Skip forward

Skip backward (unavailable for “Rhapsody

b y
Channels” ) • Available pop-up menu items vary depending on the menu level or
selected item.
y
• To play back the currently selected item (track, album, channel or
playlist) directly, press kPOP-UP MENU, press jCursor k / n to
3 Press jCursor k / n to select the desired
select “Play” and then press jENTER. operation and then press jENTER.
• To display the track list of the album that contains the currently selected • Select “Add Track to My Library” to add the
track, press kPOP-UP MENU, press jCursor k / n to select
“Show Album Page” and then press jENTER. (This menu is not currently selected track to “My Library” .
available when you have selected a track from the track list of an album). • Select “Add Album to My Library” to add the
■ Play information display currently selected album to “My Library” .
• Select “Add Channel to My Library” to add the
currently selected channel to “My Library” .
a
b 4 To exit the pop-up menu, press kPOP-UP
c MENU.
y
• To remove items from “My Library” , select the item under “My Library”
d 00:15
Title Made-to-order
04:23
, press kPOP-UP MENU, press jCursor k / n to select “Remove
e Artist Frankie Zipper
Album Road to India
from My Library” and then press jENTER.
Input Rhapsody Option Menu
DSP 7ch Enhancer Pop-Up Menu
Shuffle/repeat playback
y
a Shuffle and repeat icons • These settings are also reflected in playback of USB and PC contents.
b (playback)
c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc) or channel logo 1 Press sOPTION on the remote control
d Elapsed time, progress bar, total time while “Rhapsody” is selected as the input
e Song title, artist name, album title source.
y 2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or
• You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by
pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26). “Repeat”, press jENTER and then press
• Album arts or channel logos are available only when the selected service
provides image data.
jCursor l / h to select the desired
playback style.
Adding your favorite Rhapsody® items to
“My Library” Shuffle:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
1 Select the desired Rhapsody® item. random order.
• Select “On” to play back songs in the selected list
in random order.
Repeat:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back
repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each song.
• Select “All” to repeat all songs in the selected list.

3 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

52 En
 Other functions

Selecting the HDMI OUT jack 2 Enable the HDMI control function on each
device.

INTRODUCTION
Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack(s) to output For this unit, set “HDMI Control” to “On” (page 62).
the input signals. For external devices, refer to the manual supplied
with each device.
Press gHDMI OUT repeatedly to select the
active HDMI OUT jack(s). 3 Turn off the TV and then turn on it again.

HDMI OUT 1+2 HDMI OUT 1

(Steps 4 through 6 are required for making the TV
learn linked devices. If the connections or

PREPARATION
HDMI OUT OFF HDMI OUT 2 devices are switched, you need to carry out
• these steps again.)
HDMI OUT1+2 Outputs the signals from both the HDMI
OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks 4 Select this unit as the input source of the TV.
simultaneously.
5 Turn on the HDMI control device (Blu-ray or
HDMI OUT 1 Outputs the signals from the HDMI OUT 1
DVD player) connected to this unit.
jack.

HDMI OUT 2 Outputs the signals from the HDMI OUT 2 6 Select the HDMI control device (Blu-ray or

OPERATION
jack. DVD player) as the input source of this unit to

BASIC
HDMI OFF Not to output any signals from the HDMI check the video input.
OUT jacks. Select this setting when you do
not use the video monitor connected to one 7 Check if the HDMI control function works
of the HDMI OUT jacks. (turn on this unit or adjust the volume level
using the remote control of the TV).
y
• This unit automatically activates the HDMI OUT 1 jack when receiving

OPERATION
Note

ADVANCED
an HDMI control signal through the HDMI OUT 1 jack while the HDMI <Note>

OUT 1 jack is not selected. • In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the
followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV
may be effective.
Using the HDMI™ control function – The TV is connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit.
– “HDMI Control” is set to “On” on this unit.
– The HDMI control function is enables on the TV.
You can operate the following functions of this unit with
the remote control of your TV when the TV (HDMI y
• This unit automatically selects the TV scene (page 24) when you
control function supported) is connected to the HDMI

INFORMATION
select this unit as the device to reproduce TV sounds using the

ADDITIONAL
OUT 1 jack of this unit. remote control of your TV. That is, if you connect an audio output
jack of your TV to the AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack of this unit, you can
• Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with enjoy TV sounds with the specified sound field program soon.
TV)
• Adjusting the volume
• Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or
Using the sleep timer
TV) The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while
y this unit is playing or recording a source.
• Even if your TV supports the HDMI control function, some functions
may not be available. For details, refer to the manual supplied with your Press qSLEEP repeatedly to select the amount
TV.
• If you connect this unit and Blu-ray player or DVD player (HDMI of time.
APPENDIX

control function supported) with HDMI, you can also control those The sleep timer setting changes as follows.
devices with the HDMI control function. For details, refer to the manual
supplied with each device.
• We suggest that you use products (TV, Blu-ray/DVD player, etc.) from Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.
the same manufacturer.
• The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA Sleep Off Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min.
Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray Disc player.
If the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the front
(Steps 1 through 3 are required for the HDMI
panel display lights up.
control function setup.)
To disable the sleep timer, select “Sleep Off”.
1 Turn on all devices connected to this unit
English

with HDMI.

53 En
ADVANCED OPERATION
Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)
The Option menu allows users to configure various settings for each input source and reflect corresponding settings
automatically when an input source is switched. Also, you can view the signal information for certain input sources.
The procedure for setting the Option menu items is described below.

1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press Input source Menu items
dInput selection key) to select the BLUETOOTH (DOCK) Volume Trim, Connect/Disconnect,
desired input source. Pairing
If you press dUSB/NET on the remote control, TUNER Volume Trim, Audio Mode, Auto
press xSub-input selection key to select a Preset, Clear Preset
sub-input source.
SIRIUS Volume Trim, Clear Preset, Parental
2 Press sOPTION on the remote control. Lock

XM Volume Trim, Clear Preset

Option Menu

Volume Trim
Decoder Mode Notes
Extended Surround
Signal Info *1 Only “Volume Trim” is available when no external device is connected
to the HDMI IN jack.
*2 “Shuffile” and “Repeat” are not available during the simple remote
Input HDMI 1 mode.
DSP Straight

3 Press jCursor k / n to select the desired Details of the menu items are as follows. The
configuration will be reflected to the input source
menu item and then press jENTER.
currently selected.
4 Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select the y
• The default settings are marked with “*”.
desired setting and then press jENTER
Volume Trim
5 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION. Input source: All
To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN. Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0.0dB* to +6.0dB
(in 0.5 dB steps)
Note Reduces any change in volume when switching input
• In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after sources by correcting volume differences between input
closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to
select the current input source again. sources.
Decoder Mode
Option menu items
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, V-AUX
The following menu items are provided for each input Choices: Auto*, DTS
source. Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction.
Input source Menu items Auto Automatically selects audio input signals.
DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals
HDMI1-4 Volume Trim, Decoder Mode,
are not reproduced.
AV1-4 Extended Surround, Signal Info
V-AUX*1 Extended Surround
AV5-6 Volume Trim Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, V-AUX
Choices: Auto*, PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, Off
PHONO
Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel (or 2-channel)
AUDIO1/2 Volume Trim, Video Out input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back
MULTI CH speakers are used.
iPod (DOCK)*2 Volume Trim, Shuffle, Repeat
Auto Automatically selects the most suitable
NET RADIO (USB/NET) Volume Trim, Signal Info decoder if a flag for reproducing surround back
USB (USB/NET) Volume Trim, Signal Info, Shuffle,
channel is present, and reproduces the signals
Rhapsody (USB/NET) Repeat in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

PC (USB/NET) Volume Trim, Signal Info, Shuffle,

Repeat, Refresh

54 En
 Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)

PLIIx Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel

Movie using the PLIIxMovie decoder whether or not • HDMI error message
surround back channel signals are contained. (appears only when an error has occurred)
•

You can select this parameter when two

HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed.

INTRODUCTION
surround back speakers are connected.
PLIIx Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1- Device Over The number of HDMI components
Music channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether connected is over the limit.
or not surround back channel signals are
Out of Res. The connected monitor is not compatible
contained. You can select this parameter when with the video input signal.
one or two surround back speakers are
connected.
EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable
Audio Mode

PREPARATION
decoder for input signals whether or not the
Input source: TUNER
flag for reproducing surround back channel is Choices: Auto*, Mono
present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1-
Sets FM (or HD Radio) broadcasting receiving mode.
channel.
Off Always reproduces original signals whether or Auto Receives in stereo mode by priority.
not the flag for reproducing surround back Mono Receives in monaural mode. You can get a
channel is present. better reception in monaural mode.
Signal Info

OPERATION
Note
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, V-AUX, USB (USB/NET), NET • (U.S.A. model only)

BASIC
RADIO (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET), Rhapsody Select “Auto” to tune into HD Radio stations. When “Mono” is selected,
you can tune into analog stations only.
(USB/NET)
Displays information on audio and video signals on the Auto Preset
GUI screen and front panel display. You can change items Input source: TUNER
to be displayed using jCursor k / n. Automatically detects FM radio stations and registers
• Audio information them as preset stations (page 31).

OPERATION
ADVANCED
•
y
Format Format of digital audio signals. • (U.S.A. model only)
Automatically detects FM and AM HD Radio stations and analog FM
radio stations and registers them as preset stations.
Channel The number of input signal channels
Clear Preset
(front/surround/LFE).
Input source: TUNER, XM, SIRIUS
For example, if input signal channels are
3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, Clears preset station (TUNER: page 32, XM: page 37,
SIRIUS: page 41).

INFORMATION
“3/2/0.1” is displayed.

ADDITIONAL
If a channel that cannot be expressed as Parental Lock
the above, a total number of channels
Input source: SIRIUS
such as “5.1ch” may be displayed.
Set the Parental Lock (page 42).
Sampling The sampling frequency per second in
Shuffle
Frequency analog-to-digital conversion.
Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET),
Bitrate The bit rate of input signal per second. Rhapsody (USB/NET)
Choices: iPod (DOCK): Off*, Songs, Albums
USB (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET), Rhapsody
Notes
(USB/NET): Off*, On
• “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed
APPENDIX

when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input. Changes the shuffle playback style.
• The bit rate may vary during playback.
y
• This setting is shared among the USB/NET sub-input sources (USB, PC
• Video information and Rhapsody). For example, the playback style configured for “USB” is
• also reflected in “PC” and “Rhapsody”.
Video In Format and resolution of video input
Repeat
signal.
Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET),
Video Out Format and resolution of video output Rhapsody (USB/NET)
signal. Choices: Off*, One, All
English

Changes the repeat playback style.

Message Error messages about HDMI signals and
HDMI components. See the following for y
details of the error messages. • This setting is shared among the USB/NET sub-input sources (USB, PC
and Rhapsody). For example, the playback style configured for “USB” is
also reflected in “PC” and “Rhapsody”.

55 En
Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)

Refresh
Input source: PC (USB/NET)
Updates the PC server list displayed in the GUI screen
(page 48).
Connect / Disconnect
Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK)
Connects to or disconnects from a Bluetooth component
(page 46).
Pairing
Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK)
Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component
(page 46).
Video Out
Input source: AUDIO 1/2, MULTI CH
Choices: AV1 to AV6, Off*
Specifies a video signal to be output during an audio
reproduction. For details, see “Selecting a video signal to
be output during an audio reproduction” on this page.

Selecting a video signal to be output

during an audio reproduction
This function enables this unit to output video signals
when “AUDIO 1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” is
selected as the input source. Follow the procedure below
to select the video to be output during an audio
reproduction.

1 Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press

dInput selection keys) to select “AUDIO
1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” as the input
source.

2 Press sOPTION on the remote control.

The Option menu for the selected input source is
displayed.

3 Press jCursor k / n to select “Video Out”

and then press jENTER.

Video;;;;;;Off
4 Press jCursor l / h to select a video input
jack to be used during an audio
reproduction.
–AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
–AV3-6 (VIDEO)
–Off (no video output)

5 To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.

56 En
 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
You can call the Setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus.
For details, read “Basic operation of the Setup menu” first, and see the respective pages.
Menu/Submenu Function Page

INTRODUCTION
Speaker Setup Sets items for speakers. 59
Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 59
Manual Setup Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 59
Speaker Configuration Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the 59
connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening
environment.

PREPARATION
Speaker Level Separately adjusts volume of each speaker. 61
Speaker Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between 61
speakers and the listening position.
Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics. 61
Test Tone Generates test tones. 61
Sound Setup Sets various items for sound outputs. 62
Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones. 62

OPERATION
Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. 62

BASIC
HDMI OUT1 Fine adjusts the delay time of automatic lipsync applied when only the HDMI 62
OUT 1 jack is used or when both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks are
used.
HDMI OUT2 Fine adjusts the delay time of automatic lipsync applied when only the HDMI 62
OUT 2 jack is used.
ANALOG MONITOR OUT Adjusts the delay time applied when only the analog MONITOR OUT 62
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks are used.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
APPENDIX
English

57 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Menu/Submenu Function Page

Function Setup Sets various items for HDMI and display. 62
HDMI Sets various items for input sources. 62
HDMI Control Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a component that supports 62
the HDMI control function is connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit.
Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or 62
HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack to the active HDMI OUT jack(s) when this unit is
on standby.
Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit 62
for reproducing sound signals.
Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input 63
signals.
Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog 63
video input signals.
Display Sets items for a video monitor or the front panel display. 63
Dimmer Sets brightness of the front panel display. 63
Front Panel Display Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display. 63
GUI Position Adjusts top and bottom positions of the GUI screen displayed on the video 63
monitor.
Volume Sets items for volumes. 63
Adaptive DRC Adjusts the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the 63
minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level.
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally 64
increased.
Initial Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. 64
Input Rename Changes input source names to be displayed on the GUI screen or the front panel 64
display.
Zone Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2/3. 64
Zone2 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2. 64
Zone2 Initial Volume Sets the volume level of Zone2 applied when this unit is turned on. 64
Zone3 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level of Zone3. 64
Zone3 Initial Volume Sets the volume level of Zone3 applied when this unit is turned on. 64
Network Sets items for network features. 64
IP Address Sets the network parameters (IP address, etc) manually. 64
MAC Address Filter Sets MAC address filter to restrict access to this unit via LAN. 64
Network Standby Selects whether or not to accept the commands via network when this unit is on 65
standby.
Information Displays network information. 65
Rhapsody Information Sets your Rhapsody® account. 65
Account Status Displays the registration status of your Rhapsody® account. 65
Sign In Registers your Rhapsody® account. 65
Rhapsody Free Trial Subscribes to the Rhapsody® service using 30-day free trial. 65
Remove Account Removes your Rhapsody® account. 65
DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs. 65
Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration. 68

58 En
 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Basic operation of the Setup menu 5 Press jCursor k / n to select an item to edit
and then press jCursor l / h to change
The Setup menu screen appears on both the GUI screen the setting.
and front panel display.

INTRODUCTION
Some items in “Manual Setup” of “Speaker Setup”
GUI screen take up a full screen. To display other items in
“Manual Setup”, press jCursor k / n.
Setup Menu
Example (Speaker Configuration)
Speaker Setup
Sound Setup
Function Setup
DSP Parameter Speaker Configuration
Memory Guard
Front Speaker

PREPARATION
Small Large

Front panel display

y
;SpeakerSetup • To configure other items, repeat step 5.

In this section, procedures of setting menus using the

6 To turn off the GUI screen, press iON
video monitor are described. SCREEN.

OPERATION
BASIC
Note
1 Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.
• In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. closing the Setup menu, press dInput selection key to
select the current input source again.
2 Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then
press jENTER. Speaker Setup
The Setup menu appears on the video monitor. You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of

OPERATION
ADVANCED
adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup” (YPAO)
3 Press jCursor k / n to select the desired
for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup”
menu then press jENTER.
for manual adjustment.
Items of the selected menu are displayed.
y
Example (Function Setup) • The default settings are marked with “*”.

Auto Setup
Function Setup

INFORMATION
Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to

ADDITIONAL
HDMI
Display
Volume obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on
Input Rename
Zone positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic
Network
Rhapsody Information characteristics or the room, which are automatically
measured. For details on operations, see page 21.
y Manual Setup
• To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN.
Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on
4 If necessary, press jCursor k / n to select
manually set parameters.
the desired submenu then press jENTER. After “Auto Setup” (YPAO) is performed, you can check
automatically adjusted parameters in the “Manual Setup”
APPENDIX

Example (Volume)
menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if
Volume necessary.
Adaptive DRC
Max Volume
Off
+16.5dB ■ Speaker Configuration
Initial Volume Off
Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of
speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound
reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening
environment.
y
English

• The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size:

“Large” or “Small”. “Large” and “Small” refer to speakers with woofer
diameters 16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively.

59 En
 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Extra Speaker Assignment Large Select this when large speakers are
Choices: Zone2*, Zone2 + Zone3, Presence, None connected.
Selects the application for the EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2)
Note
terminals. • If “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front”, “Front Speaker” automatically
Zone2 Assigns the SP1 terminals for Zone2 speakers switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small”.
and disables the SP2 terminals. Center Speaker
Zone2 + Assigns the SP1 terminals for Zone2 speakers Choices: None, Small*, Large
Zone3 and SP2 terminals for Zone3 speakers. Sets the size of center speaker.
Presence Assigns the SP1 terminals for presence
speakers and disables the SP2 terminals. None Select this when no center speaker is
None Disables the EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2) connected. Center channel signals are spread
terminals. to front left and right speakers.
Small Select this when a small center speaker is
Note connected. Low-frequency components of
• When setting “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2” or “Presence”, surround center channel are output from a subwoofer.
back channel signals for main unit are separately output from other channels.
• When setting “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2 + Zone3”, surround and If a subwoofer is not connected they are
surround back channel signals for main unit are separately output from other output from front speakers.
channels.
Large Select this when a large center speaker is
LFE / Bass Out connected.
Choices: Subwoofer, Front, Both*
Surround Speaker
Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency
Choices: None, Small*, Large
components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound)
Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers.
channel or other channels. The output status is as follows.
None Select this when no surround speakers are
LFE channel signals connected. Surround channel signals are
spread to front left and right speakers.
Front Other
Parameter Subwoofer “Surround Back Speaker” automatically
speakers speakers
switches to “None” when this is selected.
Subwoofer Output Not output Not output Small Select this when small surround speakers are
Front Not output Output Not output connected. Low-frequency components of
surround channels are output from a
Both Output Not output Not output
subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected
Low-frequency components of other channel signals they are output from front speakers.
Large Select this when large surround speakers are
Front Other connected.
Parameter Subwoofer
speakers speakers
y
Subwoofer [1] [2] [2] • When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Front Not output [3] [2]
Surround Back Speaker
Both [3] [4] [2] Choices: None, Large x 1, Small x 1, Large x 2, Small x 2*
Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers.
[1] Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker,
the size of which is set to “Small”. None Select this when no surround back speaker
[2] Outputs low-frequency components when the sizes of speakers are connected. Surround back channel signals
are set to “Large”. are output from the surround L/R speakers
[3] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled,
channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to they are output from the surround L/R
“Small”. speakers and front speakers.
[4] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right Large x 1 Select this when one large surround back
channels. speaker is connected.
Front Speaker Small x 1 Select this when one small surround back
Choices: Small, Large* speaker is connected.
Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers. Large x 2 Select this when two large surround back
speakers are connected.
Small Select this when small speakers are Small x 2 Select this when two small surround back
connected. Low-frequency components of the speakers are connected.
front left and right channels are output from a
subwoofer.

60 En
 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

y FR.L / FR.R / CNTR / SUR.L / SUR.R / SBL / SBR /

• When “Surround Back Speaker” is set to “None”, “PLIIx Movie”, SWFR / PR.L / PR.R
“PLIIx Music” and “PLIIx Game” of the surround decode mode
(page 29) are not available. Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft)
Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L,
Bass Crossover Frequency

INTRODUCTION
PR.R)
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz*, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 2.60m (8.5ft) (CNTR)
160Hz, 200Hz 2.40m (8.0ft) (SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component
output from a speaker with a size set to “Small” (Small x y
• Available items differ depending on the “Speaker Configuration” settings
1, Small x 2) Sound with a frequency below that limit is (page 59).
output from a subwoofer or front speakers. • When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears
instead of “SBL” and “SBR”.
If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover
frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover ■ Equalizer

PREPARATION
frequency at the maximum. Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic
equalizer.
Subwoofer Phase
Choices: Normal*, Reverse EQ Type Select
Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are Choices: Auto PEQ, GEQ*, Off
lacking or unclear. Selects an equalizer type.

Normal Select this not to change the phase of your Auto PEQ Uses a parametric equalizer selected in
“Auto Setup”. Characteristics of the

OPERATION
subwoofer.
Reverse Select this to reverse the phase of your currently used parametric equalizer are

BASIC
subwoofer. displayed below “Auto PEQ”.
GEQ Uses a graphic equalizer. Press jENTER
■ Speaker Level to adjust the characteristics of the graphic
Adjustable range: –10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5dB step) equalizer.
Defaults: 0dB (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L, PR.R)
Off Not use a graphic equalizer.
–1.0dB (CNTR, SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)
Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the

OPERATION
GEQ

ADVANCED
sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the Channels Front Left, Front Right, Center, Surround Left,
listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending Surround Right, Surround Back Left, Surround
on the number of speakers connected. Back Right
y Choices: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz,
• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears 16kHz
instead of “SBL” and “SBR”. Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5dB step)
• You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test
Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic

INFORMATION
Tone” to “On” (on this page).

ADDITIONAL
• If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust
set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum. signal levels in 7 frequency ranges.
■ Speaker Distance To adjust the signal level within each range, press
Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so jCursor l / h to select the desired speaker while
that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at “Channel” is selected, press jCursor k / n to select the
the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of desired frequency band and then press jCursor l / h
each speaker. to adjust the signal level.
Unit ■ Test Tone
Choices: feet (ft)*, meters (m) Choices: Off*, On
Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates
APPENDIX

feet (ft) Displays the speaker distance in feet. test tones. When “On” is selected, you can adjust the
meters (m) Displays the speaker distance in meters. settings of “Manual Setup” while listening to a test tone.
Off Not generate test tones.
On Generates test tones.
English

61 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Sound Setup Function Setup

You can set various items for sound outputs. You can set various items for HDMI and display.
■ Dynamic Range HDMI
Choices: Min/Auto, STD, Max*
You can set items for HDMI.
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for
reproducing bitstream signals. ■ HDMI Control
Choices: On, Off*
Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for
low volume or a quiet environment, such as Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a
at night, for bitstream signals except for component that supports the HDMI control function is
Dolby TrueHD signals. connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit. When this
(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals input
TrueHD signals based on input signal from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX)
information. jack to the video monitor even when this unit is on
STD Sets the standard dynamic range standby.
recommended for regular home use. On Enables the HDMI control function.
Max Outputs sound without adjusting the Off Disables the HDMI control function.
dynamic range of the input signals.
y
• The BHDMI THROUGH indicator lights up in the following cases
■ Lipsync while this unit is on standby.
Adjusts delay between video output and audio output. – when the HDMI control function is on
This unit automatically adjusts the delay (automatic – when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently working
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, this unit consumes 1 to 3 watts of
lipsync) when a TV that supports the automatic lipsync is power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal passing through this
connected to the HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2 jack of unit.
this unit and HDMI signals are output only from the ■ Standby Through
corresponding HDMI OUT jack.
Choices: On, Off*
HDMI OUT1 Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack to the
Displays the delay time adjusted by automatic lipsync for active HDMI OUT jack(s) when this unit is on standby.
HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT 1 jack. To fine When this parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals
adjust the delay time, set an offset time in the “Offset” input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO
field. This offset time is also applied to the signals output AUX) jack to the video monitor(s) even when this unit is
from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when both the HDMI OUT 1 on standby.
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks are active.
On Outputs the HDMI signals to the active
HDMI OUT2 HDMI OUT jack(s)
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) Off Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI
Displays the delay time adjusted by automatic lipsync for OUT 1/2 jacks.
HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack. To fine y
adjust the delay time, set an offset time in the “Offset” • This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
• To enables HDMI signal standby-through output, any one of the input
field. sources connected to the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX)
jack must be selected before switching to standby.
ANALOG MONITOR OUT • When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, the BHDMI THROUGH
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) indicator lights up. In this state, the amount of power consumption in the
standby mode increases.
Adjusts the delay time applied when only the analog
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) ■ Audio Output
jacks are used. Choices: Amplifier*, TV, Amplifier + TV
Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI
OUT 1 jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals
input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO
AUX) jack.
Amplifier Outputs HDMI sound signals form the
speakers connected to this unit.

62 En
 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the ■ Dimmer

speakers of a TV connected to the HDMI Adjustable range: –4 to 0*
OUT 1/2 jacks of this unit. Sound output Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is
from the speakers connected to this unit is lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is

INTRODUCTION
muted. darkened.
Amplifier + Outputs HDMI sound signals from the
TV speakers connected to this unit and the Note
• The brightness of display does not become bright in Pure Direct mode
speakers of a TV connected HDMI OUT 1/2 even if the value is increased.
jacks of this unit.
■ Front Panel Display Scroll
Note Choices: Continuous*, Once
• Signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the TV
vary depending on specifications of the monitor.
Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of

PREPARATION
characters exceed a display area of the front panel display.
y
• This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Continuous Repeatedly displays all characters by
■ Resolution scrolling.
Choices: Through*, 480p(576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p Once Displays all characters by scrolling once,
Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted halts scrolling and then displays first 14
from analog video input signals and output from the characters.
HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks.
■ GUI Position

OPERATION
Notes Adjustable range: –5 to 0* to +5 (vertical/horizontal direction)

BASIC
• Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog Adjusts the position of the GUI screen displayed on the
video signals cannot be upscaled. video monitor. To move the screen up (or to the right), set
• When a video monitor is connected to one of the HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks
and the corresponding HDMI OUT jack is selected (page 53), this unit this value larger. To move the screen down (or to the left),
automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An asterisk set this value smaller.
(*) appears on the left of detected resolution.
• When a video monitor is connected to both of the HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks Volume
and “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected (page 53), this unit automatically
selects a resolution depending on the lower-resolution monitor.

OPERATION
You can set items for volumes.

ADVANCED
• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set
“MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (page 73) and try
again. ■ Adaptive DRC
Choices: Auto, Off*
■ Aspect
Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume
Choices: Through*, 16:9, Smart Zoom
level. This feature is useful when you are listening at
Sets a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled,
reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.

INFORMATION
1/2 jacks when the HDMI signals are converted from

ADDITIONAL
When the volume level is low: narrow the dynamic range
analog video input signals by a video conversion function. When the volume level is high: widen the dynamic range
Through Outputs the video signals without changing
the aspect ratio.
16:9 Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3
Output level

Output level

Auto
images on a 16:9 TV with black bands on Auto
the right and left sides of the TV screen.
Smart Zoom Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3 Off Off
images on a 16:9 TV by stretching right and Input level Input level
left of images to fit on the TV screen.
Volume : low Volume : high
APPENDIX

Notes
• You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
to “Through”. Off Not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
• This setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3.
• You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are y
input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack or • This setting is also effective for headphones.
when 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are input.

Display
You can set items for a video monitor and the front panel
English

display.

63 En
 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

■ Max Volume ■ Zone2/3 Initial Volume

Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step) Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)
Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone2/3 when
not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust the power of Zone2/3 unit is turned on. When this
the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB (or Mute) when parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used at the time
you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. The volume increases when the Zone2/3 unit was set to standby is applied.
to the maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5
Note
dB (default).
• The “Zone2 Max Volume” or “Zone3 Max Volume” setting takes priority
■ Initial Volume over the “Zone2 Initial Volume” or “Zone3 Initial Volume” setting. For
example, if you set “Zone2 Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Zone2
Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step) Initial Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB”
Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When at the next time the Zone2 unit is turned on.
this parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used when Network
this unit was set to standby is applied.
You can set items for network features.
Note
• When you set “Max Volume” and “Initial Volume” the setting of “Max ■ IP Address
Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume” Sets the network parameters (IP address, etc).
to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is
automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on. DHCP
Input Rename Choices: On*, Off
Select whether or not this unit obtain the network
Changes input source names to be displayed on the front parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway,
panel display. primary DNS server and secondary DNS server) from the
Selecting a name to be displayed from templates DHCP server of the connected network.
Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to On Select this setting when this unit can obtain
edit and then press jCursor l / h to select a new the network parameters from the DHCP
name from the templates (Blu-ray, DVD, SetTopBox, server of the connected network.
etc.). Off Select this setting when you set the network
Entering an original name parameters manually.
Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to IP Address
edit and then press jENTER. Enter up to 9 characters Use this parameter to specify the IP address assigned to
by selecting one character at a time with the following key this unit. This value must not be the same as the one used
operations. for other devices in the target network.
jCursor l / h Selects a character to edit. Subnet Mask
jCursor k / n Selects a character to enter. Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value
jENTER Enters a selected character. assigned to this unit.
The following characters are available for input. Default Gateway
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default
Zone gateway.
DNS Server (P) / DNS Server (S)
Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary
of Zone2/3.
and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
y
• The menu items for Zone2 are available only when “Extra Speaker y
Assignment” is set to “Zone2” or “Zone2 + Zone3” (page 60). • If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS
• The menu items for Zone3 are available only when “Extra Speaker Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in
Assignment” is set to “Zone2 + Zone3” (page 60). “DNS Server (P)” and another in “DNS Server (S)”.

■ Zone2/3 Max Volume ■ MAC Address Filter

Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step) Sets MAC address filter to restrict access to this unit via
Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2/3, so that the LAN.
volume will not be accidentally increased. For example, MAC Address Filter
you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB Choices: Off*, On
when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. Select whether or not to use the MAC address filter
function.
Off Disables the MAC address filter function.

64 En
 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

On Permit access to this unit only from network

devices with the specified MAC addresses. DSP Parameter
MAC Address 1-10 Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as
Specify MAC addresses of network devices that are they are with the default parameters, you can arrange

INTRODUCTION
permitted to access to this unit when “MAC Address sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions
Filter” is set to “On”. of sources or rooms by setting the parameters.
■ Network Standby 1 Press jCursor k / n to select “DSP
Choices: Off*, On Parameter” and then press jENTER.
Selects whether or not to accept the commands via
Sound field program
network when this unit is on standby.

PREPARATION
Off Not accept the commands via network. DSP Parameter
On Accept the commands via network. Program Name Sci-Fi
Decode Type PLIIx Movie
y DSP Level
P. Initial Delay
0dB
16ms
• When “Network Standby” is set to “On”, the amount of power P. Room Size 1.0
consumption in the standby mode increases. Sur. Initial Delay 2ms
Sur. Room Size 1.0

■ Information
Displays the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or
Sound field parameters Set values
vTuner ID assigned to this unit.

OPERATION
Rhapsody Information 2 Press jCursor k / n to select “Program

BASIC
Name” and then press jCursor l / h to
You can set your Rhapsody® account.
For information about the Rhapsody® service and how to select a sound field program to edit.
play back Rhapsody® contents, see “Using the Rhapsody®
service” (page 51).
3 Press jCursor k / n to select a parameter to
edit and then press jCursor l / h to
■ Account Status change the setting.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
Displays the registration status of your Rhapsody®
y
account. If “Not Available” appears, check the network • Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change other sound field program
settings. parameters.

■ Sign In To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field

Use this menu to register your Rhapsody® account with program, press jCursor n repeatedly to select
your user name and password provided by Rhapsody®. To “Initialize” and then press jCursor h. Then, press
start registration, follow steps 3 and 4 in “Account setup jCursor h again to execute the initialization or

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
for Rhapsody®”(page 51). jCursor l to cancel it.
If an error message appears (page 84), confirm your user
name and password and then try again. CINEMA DSP basic parameters
■ Rhapsody Free Trial DSP Level
Use this menu to subscribe to the Rhapsody® service
Adjustable range: –6dB to 0dB* to +3dB
using 30-day free trial. To subscribe to the free-trial
Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect
service, read the description on the GUI screen and then
to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field
select “Yes” if you accept the terms and conditions.
effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as
If you have subscribed to the free trial service, the
follows.
remaining service days and account number (required for
APPENDIX

• The effect sound is too soft.

receiving Rhapsody® support) appear on the GUI screen.
• There are no differences between effects of the sound
■ Remove Account field programs.
Removes your Rhapsody® account. →Increase the effect level.

• The sound is dull.

• The sound field effect is added too much.
→Reduce the effect level.
English

65 En
 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Dialogue Lift
Sound field parameters for advanced
Choices: 0* to 5
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
configurations
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is ■ Parameters for adjusting early-reflected
at the center of the video monitor screen. sound
Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay / Sur. Initial Delay /
Sur. Back Initial Delay
Adjustable range: 1 to 99ms (Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay), 1 to
The ideal dialogue 49ms (Sur. Initial Delay / Sur. Back Initial
position
Delay)
Adjusts attenuation characteristics of early-reflected
sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a
monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”. dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as
you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field
or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined
by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection
surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the
attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is
created when the attenuation time is long.
Move up to the ideal
dialogue position
Original source sound

When the value is set to zero, the position is at the lowest. Early-reflected
The position gets higher as you increase the value. sound
Level

Level
Notes
• This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to Time Time
“Presence” (page 60). Delay Delay
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue
position.
Sound source
3D DSP
Choices: On*, Off
When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, sets whether to use Reflecting
sound field programs in 3D mode. surface

Note
• This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to Small = 1ms Large = 99ms
“Presence” (page 60).
y
• We recommended that you adjust the size of corresponding sound field
when you adjust the delay time.

■ Parameters for specifying room size

Room Size / P. Room Size / Sur. Room Size / Sur.
Back Room Size
Adjustable range: 0.1 to 2.0
Produces different senses of sound expansion according to
room sizes specified. In a large size room such as a music
hall, the duration from when reflected sound is heard until
when the next reflected sound is heard is long. Thus,
different senses of sound expansion can be created by
changing the duration. 1.0 is the original room size. When
this parameter is set to 2.0, each side of the room is
defined as twice larger than the original room size.

66 En
 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

■ Parameters for adjusting reverberant sound

Source sound
Reverb Time
Early reflections Adjustable range: 1.0 to 5.0s
Reverb Time parameter adjusts the attenuation time of the

INTRODUCTION
Level

Level
rear reverberant sound based on the time that about 1kHz
Time Time reverberant sound takes for 60dB of attenuation.
Reverberant sound attenuates faster as you decrease the
Sound source value. Reverb Time adjustment allows you to create a
natural reverberant sound, by setting the attenuation time
longer for a sound source or room with less echo, or
shorter for a sound source or room with more echo.

PREPARATION
Rear
Rear reverberation Source sound reverberation
Early reflections

Small = 0.1 Large = 2.0

60dB 60dB

■ Parameters for defining attenuation

characteristics of early-reflected sound Time Time
Reverb Time Reverb Time

OPERATION
Liveness / P. Liveness / Sur. Liveness / Sur. Back Short Long

BASIC
Liveness reverberation reverberation
Adjustable range: 0 to 10
Adjusts the attenuation of reflected sound. You can create
a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level) Sound source
as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a
low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value.
Small = 1.0s Large = 5.0s
Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in

OPERATION
ADVANCED
an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic
Reverb Delay
absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead
Adjustable range: 0 to 250ms
sound field is created when the attenuation time is short
while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation Reverb Delay parameter adjusts the time difference
time is long. between the beginning of the direct sound and the
beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value,
Source sound the later the reverberation sound begins. Increasing the

INFORMATION
value of Reverb Delay allows you to create a reverberant

ADDITIONAL
Live
sound in a wider area for the same Reverb Time.
Dead
Level

Level

Source sound
Level

Time Time
(dB)

60dB
Small reflected Large reflected
sound sound
APPENDIX

Reverberation

Time
Small = 0 Large = 10

Reverb Delay Reverb Time

English

67 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)

Reverb Level ■ Parameter for Straight Enhancer and 7ch

Adjustable range: 0 to100% Enhancer
Reverb Level parameter adjusts the reverberation sound Effect Level
level. Increasing the value of Reverb Level makes the Choices: High*, Low
reverbration sound level higher, which allows you to
Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level.
create more echo.
When the high-frequency signals of the source is
emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low”. To
Source sound
reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low”.
Level

Decoder parameters
(dB)
You can customize decoder effects by setting the
Reverb Level following parameters. For details about the types of
decoders, see “Surround decode mode” (page 29).
■ Parameter for PLIIx Music and PLII Music
Panorama
Time Choices: Off*, On
Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends
Parameters for certain sound field stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front
programs speakers for a wraparound effect.
■ Parameter for MOVIE sound field programs Dimension
Adjustable range: –3 to STD* to +3
Decode Type
Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound
Choices: PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema
field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the
Selects the decoder type for use with the MOVIE sound difference in level created by the software being played
field programs. back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround
Note sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative
• You cannot select a decoder for the following MOVIE sound field and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value
programs. more positive.
– Mono Movie
– Sports Center Width
– Action Game
– Roleplaying Game Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7
You can spread the center sound toward left and right
■ Parameter for 2ch Stereo
according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for
Direct outputting the center sound from the center speaker only,
Choices: Auto*, Off or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker.
Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control ■ Parameter for Neo:6 Music
circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the
input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound. Center Image
Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3* to 1.0
Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and
Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to
tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble”
the center channel to make the center channel more or less
tone controls are both set to 0 dB.
dominant as necessary.
Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control.
■ Parameters for 7ch Stereo Memory Guard
Center Level / Surround L Level / Surround R
Level / Surround Back Level / Presence L Level / Choices: Off*, On
Presence R Level Protects the Setup menu settings against accidental
Adjustable range: 0 to 100%
alteration.
Adjusts the volume of the center, surround L/R, surround Off Not protect settings.
back and presence L/R channels in the 7ch Stereo On Protects the Setup menu settings (except for
program. The available parameters differ depending on the “Decode Type” in “DSP Parameter” and
setting of the speakers. “Memory Guard”).
Note
• When this parameter is switched to “On”, “ ” appears at the top left
corner of the Setup menu screen.

68 En
 Using multi-zone configuration
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. This feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate
input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone2) and third zone (Zone3). You can control this unit from the second

INTRODUCTION
zone or third zone using the supplied remote control.
Only analog signal can be sent to the second and third zones. If you want to output sounds to Zone2/3, connect an
external component to the AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks (by analog connection). For example, if you want to output
sound from an HDMI DVD player to the second zone, you must connect the HDMI DVD player to this unit by both
HDMI and analog connections.

Connecting Zone2/3

PREPARATION
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a CD
player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone and/or third zone.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest

OPERATION
authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2/3 connections that best meet your requirements.

BASIC
• Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. You may not need use an infrared signal emitter for these products. Up
to 6 components can be connected using monaural analog mini cables or via an IR flashers. For details about connections, see “Transmitting/receiving
remote control signals” (page 18).

Using external amplifiers

Connect an amplifier/receiver in the second zone and/or third zone and other components to this unit as follows.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
S
ZO
MONITOR OUT SPEAKERS
COMPONENT
VIDEO
REMOTE

PR IN

OUT
PB VIDEO

Y
FRONT CENTER SURROUND

CENTER SING

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER FRONT SURROUND SUR. B
AUDIO ZONE2 ZONE3
O1 AUDIO2 MULTI CH INPUT OUT OUT OUT PRE O
Analog audio output

Analog audio output

Remote control in

Remote control out

L R L R APPENDIX

IR flasher or IR receiver Zone2 amplifier Zone3 amplifier

Yamaha component in Zone2 (Yamaha component)
(DVD player, etc)
English

69 En
 Using multi-zone configuration

From the ZONE3 OUT jacks

From the ZONE2 OUT jacks

Amplifier Amplifier

Analog audio signals only

This unit Third zone
Remote control (Zone 3)
DVD player etc.
MAIN
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
Infrared signal
receiver
Infrared signal
emitter
Second zone
Main zone (Zone 2)

From the REMOTE OUT jack To the REMOTE IN jack

Using the internal amplifiers of this unit

Important safety notice

The EXTRA SP terminals of this unit should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than
one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your unit.

If you want to use one internal amplifier of this unit

Connect the Zone 2 speakers directly to the SP1 terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2”
(page 60)
If you want to use two internal amplifiers of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment”
to “Zone2 + Zone3” (page 60).

SP1 SP2
Zone2 speakers ZONE2/PRESENCE ZONE3
Zone3 speakers

This unit

y
• You can use the speakers connected to EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2) terminals as the front speaker system of another zone.
• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone2/3 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume and maximum volume of the
Zone2/3 speakers (page 64).

70 En
 Using multi-zone configuration

Controlling Zone2/3 Operations in the Zone2/3 operation mode

You can select and control Zone2/3 by using the control ■ Turning on or set Zone2 to standby
keys on the front panel or on the remote control. The

INTRODUCTION
Press AZONE2 ON/OFF (or pPOWER).
available operations are as follows:
• Selecting the input source. ■ Turning on or set Zone3 to standby
• Tuning into the desired station (when “TUNER” is
selected as the input source) Press CZONE3 ON/OFF (or pPOWER).
• Tuning into the desired channel (when “XM” or
■ Operating Zone2/3
“SIRIUS” is selected as the input source) (U.S.A. model
only) Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press dInput
• Adjusting the volume of Zone2/3 (when Zone2/3

PREPARATION
selection key) to select the desired input
speakers are connected to the EXTRA SP terminals).
source.
Switching to the Zone2/3 operation mode If you press dUSB/NET on the remote control, press
xSub-input selection key to select a sub-input
Before controlling Zone2/3 by using the control keys on source.
the front panel or on the remote control, follow the • Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, “AUDIO2” or
procedure below to switch this unit to the Zone2/3 “PHONO” to listen to the input source in the selected
operation mode. zone.

OPERATION
■ To control Zone2/3 by using the front panel • Select “DOCK” to use the iPod features (page 44) or

BASIC
control keys Bluetooth features (page 46) in the selected zone.
• Select “TUNER” to use the FM/AM radio features
Press DZONE CONTROLS repeatedly to select (page 31) in the selected zone.
the zone you want to control while the target • Select “SIRIUS” to use the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
zone is turned on. features (page 39) in the selected zone.
The zone indicator flashes on the front panel display for • Select “XM” to use the XM Satellite Radio features
(page 35) in the selected zone.

OPERATION
approximately 10 seconds.

ADVANCED
• Select “USB” to use the USB features (page 47) in the
selected zone.
ZONE or ZONE • Select “NET RADIO” to use the Internet Radio features
2 3
(page 50) in the selected zone.
• Select “PC” to use the PC features (page 48) in the
Flashes Flashes selected zone.
• Select “Rhapsody” to use the Rhapsody® features

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
Note (page 51) in the selected zone.
• Complete each step while the zone indicator is flashing on the front panel
display. Otherwise, the Zone2 or Zone3 operation mode is automatically Note
canceled and this unit returns to the main zone operation mode. • The sub-input source (USB, NET RADIO, PC and Rhapsody) for “USB/
NET” is shared among all zones (main, Zone2 and Zone3). You cannot
■ To control Zone2/3 by using the remote select different sub-input source for each zone.
control

Switch bZone selection switch to “ZONE2”

or “ZONE3” position.
APPENDIX
English

71 En
 Controlling other components with the remote control
You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for
controlling external components are as follows:
cSOURCE POWER Default
Turns on and off an external component. Input source Category Manufacturer
code
jCursor, ENTER, RETURN [TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007 (fixed)
Operates the menus of external components. [SIRIUS] Tuner Yamaha 5017 (fixed)
kExternal component operation keys [XM] Tuner Yamaha 5009 (fixed)
Function as a recording or playback key of an external
[USB/NET] — Yamaha — (fixed)
component, or a menu display key.
“—” indicates no assignment
lNumeric keys
Function as numeric keys of an external component. y
• An external component controlled by the remote control is automatically
selected according to selection of the scenes (page 24).
mTV control keys
INPUT Switches visual inputs of TV Setting remote control codes
MUTE Mutes audio of TV
TV VOL +/– Controls the volume of TV You can control other components by setting the
TV CH +/– Switches channels of TV appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
POWER Turns on and off TV available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
uDISPLAY You should perform each step within 1 minute after the
Switches between the screens of external components. previous step.
y
• You can use mTV control keys to control your TV regardless of a 1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control
selected input source if a remote control code for your TV is assigned to
dAV1, dAV4 or dPHONO (in the order of descending priorities). using a pointed object such as the tip of a
• You need to set the remote control code first to control external ballpoint pen.
components.
• The remote control keys for controlling external components are nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
available only when the external components have corresponding control
keys. 2 Press the desired dInput selection key.
To use mTV control keys to control your TV,
The following remote control codes are assigned to input assign a remote control code for your TV to dAV1,
sources as factory default settings. dAV4 or dPHONO.
■ Default remote control code settings
3 Press lNumeric keys to enter a remote
Default control code.
Input source Category Manufacturer
code
Once the remote control code is registered,
[HDMI 1] Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018 nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails,
[HDMI 2] — — — nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from
step 1.
[HDMI 3] — — —
[HDMI 4] — — — Resetting all remote control codes
[AV 1] — — —
You can reset all remote control codes to the factory
[AV 2] — — — default settings.
[AV 3] CD Yamaha 5013
1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control
[AV 4] — — — using a pointed object such as a tip of a
[AV 5] — — — ballpoint pen.
[AV 6] — — — nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
[AUDIO 1] — — — 2 Press iON SCREEN.
[AUDIO 2] — — —
[V-AUX] — — —
3 Press lNumeric keys to enter “9981”.
Once the initialization is complete, nTRANSMIT
[PHONO] — — — blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six
[MULTI] — — — times. Repeat from step 1.
[DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011 (fixed)

72 En
 Advanced setup
In the advanced setup menu, you can set basic operations MON.CHK - XXXX
of this unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or Choices: YES*, SKIP
initialize user settings. Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video

INTRODUCTION
monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT
1 Set this unit to standby. jack.
2 While holding down QSTRAIGHT on the INIT-XXXXXXXXX
front panel, press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF. Choices: DSP PARAM, VIDEO, NETWORK, ALL,
Keep holding down QSTRAIGHT until CANCEL*
“ADVANCED SETUP” appears on the front panel Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can
display. select an initialization method from the following.

PREPARATION
DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field
programs
VIDEO Video conversion settings (resolution/
ADVANCEDSETUP aspect) in the Setup menu and the GUI
display position
3 Rotate the PPROGRAM selector to select NETWORK Network settings in the Setup menu
the parameter you want to change. ALL All
The default setting are marked with “*”. CANCEL Cancellation of initialization

OPERATION
y USB FirmUpdate

BASIC
• Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an
actual display screen. NET FirmUpdate
SP IMP. -XXX Updates the firmware of this unit. For details on how
Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN*
to update the firmware, refer to information supplied
with updates.
Selects output impedance of this unit according to
connected speakers. When you connect 4-ohm Notes

OPERATION
speakers to the FRONT speaker terminals, set “SP

ADVANCED
• Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware.
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN.”. • Be sure to read information supplied with updates before updating
the firmware.
RS232C STBY -X VERXXX.XXX.XXX
Choices: Y (Yes)*, N (No) Displays the firmware of this unit.
Selects whether or not to transmit data via the RS-
232C terminal when this unit is in the standby mode. 4 Press OSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change
REMOTE ID -XXX the selected parameter setting.

INFORMATION
ADDITIONAL
Choices: ID1*, ID2 To change other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple
Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a 5 Press KMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this
single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to unit to standby.
the same setting. The settings you made are reflected next time you
turn on this unit.
SR PIN -XXX
Choices: RESET, CANCEL*
Resets Parental lock cord when using SIRIUS
Satellite tuner.
APPENDIX

BI AMP - XXX
Choices: ON, OFF*
Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main
speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12.
SCENE IR -XXX
Choices: ON*, OFF
Selects whether or not to transmit the control signals
to an external component connected to the REMOTE
English

OUT jack on this unit when BD/DVD or CD SCENE

function is selected.

73 En
 Advanced setup

Setting a remote control ID

Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If
another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a
different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted
operation of the other amplifier.

“ID1” is set for both the main unit and remote control by
default. If you have changed the remote control ID, make
sure that you select the same ID for the main unit in the
the advanced setup menu.
y
• For details on how to set the remote control ID of the simplified remote
control, see page 8.

1 Press oCODE SET on the remote control

using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.

2 Press iON SCREEN.

3 Enter the desired remote control ID code.

To switch to ID1, press lNumeric keys to enter
“5019”.
To switch to ID2, press lNumeric keys to enter
“5020”.

Once the remote control code is registered,

nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat
from step 1.
y
• If you initialize the settings of this unit, “REMOTE ID” (remote control
code of this unit) is set to “ID1”.

74 En
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting

INTRODUCTION
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.

General
See
Problem Cause Remedy
page

PREPARATION
This unit does not The internal microcomputer is frozen due Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, —
operate properly. to an external electric shock (such as wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.
lightning or excessive static electricity) or
by a drop in power supply voltage.

This unit suddenly The internal temperature is too high and Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then —
enters the standby the overheat protection circuitry has been turn it back on.
mode activated.

OPERATION
The protection circuitry has been activated Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 73

BASIC
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each —
other and then turn this unit back on.

The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit and play the source again. —

This unit fails to turn The power cable is not connected or the Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall 20
on or enters the plug is not completely inserted. outlet.
standby mode soon

OPERATION
ADVANCED
The speaker impedance setting is Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 73
after the power is
incorrect.
turned on.
(When this unit is turned back on and Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit 11
“CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The and speakers are connected properly.
protection circuitry has been activated
because this unit was turned on while a
speaker cable was shorted.

APPENDIX
This unit cannot be The internal microcomputer is frozen due Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, —
turned off. to an external electric shock (such as wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.
lightning or excessive static electricity) or
by a drop in power supply voltage.

English

75 En
Troubleshooting

See
Problem Cause Remedy
page

No picture. An appropriate video input is not selected Select an appropriate video input on the video —
on the video monitor. monitor.

An appropriate HDMI OUT jack is not Select the HDMI OUT jack which your video 53
selected. monitor is connected.

The external video component is Connect the external video component to the video 14, 16
connected to one of the HDMI 1-4 jacks input jacks other than the HDMI 1-4 jacks or connect
or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack while the video monitor to one of the HDMI OUT jacks or
your video monitor is connected to the HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack.
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT
VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.

This unit outputs the video signals not Displays the advanced setup menu and select 73
supported by the video monitor connected “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters.
to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.
Displays the advanced setup menu and set 73
“MON.CHK” to “YES”.

Video signals are input from a game Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT 14
console while your video monitor is (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.

Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT 14
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.

The picture is The video software is copy-protected.

disturbed.

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, 16
connections. the cables may be defective.

No appropriate input source has been Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press dInput 24
selected. selection key) to select the desired input source.

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11

The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. 24

Signals this unit cannot reproduce are Display “Signal Info” in the Option menu and check —
being input from a source component, the input signal format.
such as a CD-ROM. If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback
component is properly connected to this unit (or a
proper input source is selected).
If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format
cannot be reproduced by this unit.

The HDMI components connected to this Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP 92
unit do not support the HDCP copy copy protection standards.
protection standards.

“Audio Output” in “HDMI” is set to Set “Audio Output” (Function Setup → HDMI → 62
“TV”. Audio Output) to the other setting.

A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the Option menu and set “Decoder Mode” to 54
“Auto”.

Only the center When a monaural source sound field Try another sound field program. 27
speaker outputs program is applied, sound of all channels
substantial sound. are output from the center speaker for
some surround decoders.

The playback component or speakers are Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, 12, 16
not connected properly. the cables may be defective.

76 En
 Troubleshooting

See
Problem Cause Remedy
page

No sound is output Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel 6, 24, 27,

INTRODUCTION
from a specific display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off, 59
speaker. try the following.
1) Change the input source to another one.
2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not
output from that speaker. Select another sound field
program.
3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on
this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup”
menu and enables output of that speaker.

PREPARATION
The volume of that speaker is set to Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu and 61
minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the adjust the volume (Manual Setup → Speaker Level).
“Setup” menu.

This unit is in the straight decode mode. Press QSTRAIGHT (or rSTRAIGHT) to turn 30
off the straight decode mode.

Sound may not be output from certain Try another sound field program. 27
channels depending on input sources or

OPERATION
sound field programs.

BASIC
The speaker is malfunction. Check the speaker indicators on the front panel —
display. If the corresponding indicator lights up,
connect another speaker and check if sound is output.
If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction.

No sound is heard “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front” and a Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Subwoofer” or “Both”. 60
from the subwoofer. Dolby Digital, DTS or AAC signals is

OPERATION
ADVANCED
being played.

“LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Subwoofer” or Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Both”. 60
“Front” and a 2-channel source is being
played.

The source does not contain low

frequency signals.

No sound is heard “Extended Surround” in the Option menu Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto”. 54

APPENDIX
from the surround is set to “Off”, or an input signal does not
back speakers. contain a surround back flag with
“Extended Surround” set to “Auto”.

The audio input The connected component is not set to Set the playback component properly referring to its —
sources cannot be output the desired digital audio signals. operating instructions.
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format.

Multi-channel The connected component is set to output Set the playback component properly referring to its —
playback is not 2-ch or PCM signals. operating instructions.
available.
“Audio Output” is set to “Amplifier + Set “Audio Output” to “Amplifier”. 62
TV”.
English

77 En
Troubleshooting

See
Problem Cause Remedy
page

Noise/hum noise is Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem —
heard. persists, the cables may be defective.

A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output 16, 54

If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this
unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback
component to this unit by digital connection and play
back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,
the problem may results from the playback
component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback
component.
2) When noise is output during playback or skip
operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option
menu after selecting the input source and set
“Decoder Mode” to “DTS”.

The volume level The component connected to the AUDIO Turn on the power of the component. 72
cannot be increased, 1/2 jacks of this unit is turned off.
or the sound is
distorted.

“Memory Guard!” is “Memory Guard” in “Set Menu” is set to Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 68
displayed and the “On”.
setting cannot be
changed.

There is noise This unit is too close to other digital or Move this unit further away from such equipment. —
interference from radio frequency equipment.
digital or radio
frequency equipment.

HDMI™
See
Problem Cause Remedy
page

No picture or sound. The number of the connected HDMI Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —
components is over the limit.

The connected HDMI component does not Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 92
support high-bandwidth digital copyright
protection (HDCP).

78 En
 Troubleshooting

Tuner (FM/AM)
See
Problem Cause Remedy

INTRODUCTION
page

FM stereo reception is You are too far from the station Check the antenna connections. 20
noisy. transmitter or the input from the
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more —
antenna is weak.
sensitive multi-element antenna.

Switch to monaural mode. 55

There is distortion, and There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or —

PREPARATION
FM clear reception cannot place it in a different location.
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.

The desired station You are in an area far from a station or Replace an outdoor antenna with more —
cannot be tuned into an input from the antenna is weak. sensitive multi element antenna.
with the automatic
Tune in manually or by direct frequency 31
tuning method.
tuning.

OPERATION
The desired station The signal is weak or the antenna Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 20
cannot be tuned into connections are loose.

BASIC
Use the manual tuning method. 31
with the automatic
tuning method.

There are continuous Supplied AM loop antenna is not Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even 20
AM crackling and hissing connected. if you use an outdoor antenna.
noises.
The noises may be caused by lightning, It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, 20

OPERATION
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats but it can be reduced by installing and

ADVANCED
and other electrical equipment. properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.

There are buzzing and A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —
whining noises.

HD Radio™ Reception (U.S.A. model only)

APPENDIX
See
Problem Cause Remedy
page

This unit cannot The radio station provides analog FM/AM Select other radio stations that provides the HD Radio 33
receive the HD Radio radio service only. service.
signals of the
The signal is too weak. Adjust the antenna position. —
selected radio station.
Use a high-quality FM/AM antenna. —

“Audio Mode” in the Option menu is set Set “Audio Mode” to “Auto”. 55
to “Mono”.

This unit cannot The radio station provides one audio

select other audio program only.
programs than the
main program.

HD Radio information The radio station does not provide the

does not appear. information.
English

79 En
Troubleshooting

iTunes Tagging (U.S.A. model only)

See
Problem Cause Remedy
page

Tag data cannot be “YDS-10” does not support tag file Use “YDS-11” to transfer tag data from this unit to —
transferred to your transfer. your iPod.
iPod when it is station
in the Yamaha iPod
universal dock (YDS-
10).

See
Status message Cause Remedy
page

Insufficient Data Tag data is not saved because of invalid The selected HR Radio program (or song being —
data. played) does not support the iTunes Tagging feature.

Tag Already Stored Tag data for the same content has been
already saved.

Tag Storage full Tag data cannot be stored because the Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock —
internal memory of this unit is full. (YDS-11) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit.

iPod full Tag data cannot be stored on your iPod Delete unnecessary data from your iPod to make —
Tags cannot be stored because the HDD space of your iPod is room and try again.
full.

Transferring Failed Tag data cannot be transferred to your Check if the iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod —
iPod. universal dock (YDS-11) properly.

Storing Tag Tag data is being stored in the internal

memory of this unit.

Transferring Tag data is being transferred to your iPod.

Tag(s)Sent Tag data has been transferred to your

iPod.

XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen.
In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

See
Status message Cause Remedy
page

CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the 35
XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected cable is connected to this unit.
to this unit.

CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to 35
XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the
antenna cable has become damaged. antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if
the cable is damaged.

LOADING XM The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or This message should disappear in a few seconds in 38
program information from the XM good signal conditions. If you see this message often,
satellite signal. This message can also reposition the XM antenna to get better signal
occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note reception. Use the “Antenna” information on the front
that this unit may not respond to some panel display or XM information on the GUI screen
operations while this message is to check the antenna reception level.
displayed.

80 En
 Troubleshooting

See
Status message Cause Remedy
page

NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the 38

INTRODUCTION
XM satellite signal. Something may be XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the
blocking the XM antenna’s view of the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or
satellites or the antenna is not properly XM information on the GUI screen to check the
aimed. antenna reception level. See instructions supplied
with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna
installation information.

CHANNEL OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select —
currently broadcasting. another channel.

PREPARATION
CHANNEL NOT You may be attempting to tune to an XM Consult the latest channel guide at —
AUTHORIZED channel that is blocked or that you cannot http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of
receive with your XM subscription channels. For information on receiving this channel,
package. visit http://www.xmradio.com/ or contact XM
Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346.

CHANNEL NOT The selected channel is not available. The Consult the latest channel guide at —
AVAILABLE channel may have been reassigned to a http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of
different channel number. This message channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-Tuner or an

OPERATION
may occur initially with a new XM Mini- XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for

BASIC
Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to
received XM’s signal for an extended receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes
period. and then try to select the channel again.

---- No artist name or song title is available for No action required. —

this selection.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the GUI screen.
In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
See
Status message Cause Remedy
page

ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the Check the connection of the antenna and 39

APPENDIX
SiriusConnect tuner properly. SiriusConnect tuner.

SIRIUS LOADING This unit is communicating with the The message disappears normally within several tens —
SiriusConnect tuner. of seconds.

CHECK SIRIUS The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and 39
TUNER to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly. this unit.

The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to 39
to the AC wall outlet. the AC wall outlet.

NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit 39
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner. supports,

ACQUIRING SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the 43
SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “Antenna” information
on the front panel display or SIRIUS information on
the GUI screen to check the antenna reception level.

UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the Wait until the updating is complete. —
channel list.

The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the 39
English

subscription.

F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the Wait until the updating is complete. —
firmware.

81 En
Troubleshooting

See
Status message Cause Remedy
page

CALL 888-539-SIRIUS The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the 39
TO SUBSCRIBE selected channel.
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

Select another channel. 39

SUBSCRIPTION The subscription information is updated.

UPDATED

INVALID CHANNEL The selected channel is currently out of Select another channel. 39
service.

Not Available The operation you made is not available.

Remote control

See
Problem Cause Remedy
page

The remote control Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum 6
does not work or range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees
function properly. offaxis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. —
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe
light, etc.) is striking the remote control
sensor of this unit.

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 6, 8

The remote control ID of the remote Match the remote control ID of this unit and the 74
control and this unit do not match. remote control.

The remote control code is not correctly Set the remote control code correctly using “List of 72
set. remote control codes” at the end of this manual.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer 72

using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.

If this unit does not work when you press jCursor, —

do the following.
When the key does not work during DVD disc menu
operation: press the dInput selection keys on
the remote control again.
When the key does not work during Option menu or
Setup menu operation: press the key applicable for
the current menu operation again.

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.

82 En
 Troubleshooting

iPod™
Note

INTRODUCTION
• In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and GUI screen, check the connection of your iPod
(page 18).

See
Status message Cause Remedy
page

Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring

PREPARATION
song lists from your iPod.

Connect error There is a problem with the signal path Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod 18
from your iPod to this unit. universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock 44

and then place it back in the dock.

Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by Use an iPod supported by this unit. —
this unit.

OPERATION
iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the

BASIC
Yamaha iPod universal dock.

Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha 44

iPod universal dock.

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod —
currently stored on your iPod. are playable.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
Bluetooth™
See
Status message Cause Remedy
page

Searching... The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and

the Bluetooth component are in the
middle of the pairing.

APPENDIX
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and
the Bluetooth component are in the
middle of establishing the connection.

Completed The pairing is completed.

Canceled The pairing is canceled.

BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the
Bluetooth component is established.

Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected

from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver.

Not Found No Bluetooth components are found Pairing must be performed on the both this unit and 46
during a pairing process. your Bluetooth component at the same time. Check
whether your Bluetooth component is set to the
paring mode and then try again.

No Bluetooth components are found Check whether your Bluetooth component is turned 46
English

during a Bluetooth connection. on and then try again.

Locate your Bluetooth component within 10 meters 46

(33 feet) of this unit and then try again.

83 En
Troubleshooting

USB and network

See
Problem Cause Remedy
page

The music files and The music files and folders are stored the Place the music files and folders in the FAT area. —
folders in the USB locations other than the FAT area.
storage device cannot
You are attempting to browse directory Modify the data structure on your USB storage —
be browsed.
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory device.
with more than 500 files.

This unit cannot recognize some Edit the file name or folder name using a PC and then —
characters used in the file name or folder try again.
name.

The USB storage The USB storage device is not compatible Use a USB storage device that is compatible with —
device cannot be with mass storage class (except USB mass storage class (except USB HDDs).
recognized. HDDs).

This unit does not recognize the USB Turn this unit off and then turn on again. 20
storage device properly.

The PC server/ The network cable is not connected Connect the network cable properly. 19
Internet Radio/ properly.
Rhapsody® does not
The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON. 64
function properly.
Alternately, perform manual configuration according
to the current operating environment.

The music on the PC The PC does not have Windows Media Install Windows Media Player 11 on the PC. —
server cannot be Player 11 installed on it.
played back.
The music is recorded in a format that Play music recorded in a format that this unit is —
cannot be played on this unit. This unit compatible with.
cannot play music formats other than
WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA,
MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC. Also note some
music files cannot be played regardless of
the file formats.

Internet Radio The firewall of the network device is Check the firewall setting of the network device. —
stations cannot be activated. Internet Radio stations can only
played. be played when the signal pass through
the port designated by the individual radio
stations. The port number varies from
station to station.

Connection to the Internet is not available. Check the configuration of the network device and —
contact your Internet service provider.

Skip forward Skip forward works up to 30 times every 3 —

operation becomes hours during playback of a Rhapsody®
not available during channel.
playback of a
Rhapsody® channel.

See
Status message Cause Remedy
page

USB Connected Your USB storage device is connected. —

USB Disconnected Your USB storage device has been Check the connection between this unit and your —
disconnected from the USB port of this USB storage device.
unit.

84 En
 Troubleshooting

See
Status message Cause Remedy
page

Access Error This unit cannot access your USB storage Try another USB storage device. —

INTRODUCTION
(ACCESS ERROR) device.

There is a problem with the signal path Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage 19, 20
from your USB storage device to this unit. device to the USB port of this unit.

Try resetting your USB storage device. —

This unit cannot connect to the data server Check the network settings and contact your Internet 64
due to network error, etc. service provider.

Access Denied The PC you are attempting to connect has Configure the sharing setting of Windows Media 48

PREPARATION
denied connection. Player 11 and select this unit as a device to which
music contents are shared.

Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs Make sure Windows Media Player 11 is installed on —
currently stored on your PC. your PC.

Play music recorded in a format that this unit is —

compatible with (WAV (PCM format only), MP3,
WMA, MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC).

OPERATION
License unavailable You are attempting to play back expired Select a file that is not protected by DRM —

BASIC
digital rights management (DRM)
encrypted content.

Windows Media Player 11 does not Acquire the license to play back the file on Windows —
acquire the digital rights management Media Player 11.
(DRM) license for the file.

LOGIN OK You have successfully logged into the

OPERATION
ADVANCED
Rhapsody® account.

LOGIN FAILED Your attempt to log in to the Rhapsody® Retry with the correct user name. 51
account failed because of an incorrect user
name.

WRONG PASSWORD Your attempt to log in to the Rhapsody® Retry with the correct password. 51
account failed because of an incorrect
password.

APPENDIX
x days left Your trial account will be expired in x Sign up for Rhapsody® to use the service 65
days. continuously.
For more information,
http://www.rhapsody.com/yamaha/go

Your account has Your account has already expired. Sign up for Rhapsody® to use the service 65
expired continuously.
For more information,
http://www.rhapsody.com/yamaha/go

No Contents No Rhapsody® items match your search Retry with another keyword. 51
keyword.

No Rhapsody® items exist in “My Add your favorite Rhapsody® items to “My Library”. 52
Library”.

Skip Limit Reached Skip forward works up to 30 times every 3 It will be resumed in 3 hours or after once you stop 51
hours during playback of a Rhapsody® the playback.
channel.
English

85 En
 Troubleshooting

Auto Setup (YPAO)

Notes
• If the an error or warning message appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again.
• Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal.
• Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.
• If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.

Before Auto Setup

See
Error message Cause Remedy
page

Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the 21
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. —

Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 68

During Auto Setup

See
Error message Cause Remedy
page

E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11
detected.

E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11
channels are detected.

E-3:NO PRNS SP Only signals from one of the presence L/ Check the presence L/R speaker connections. 11
R channels are detected.

E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal If you connect only one surround back speaker, 11
is detected. connect it to the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.

E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. —
accurately due to loud ambient noise.
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air —
conditioners or move them away from the optimizer
microphone.

E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected, When using surround back speakers, you need to 11
though surround L/R speakers are not. connect surround L/R speakers.

E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto 21
unplugged during the “Auto Setup” Setup”.
procedure.

E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 21
detect test tones.
Check whether the speakers are properly placed and 10, 11
connected.

The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC —

jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha
dealer or service center.

E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was canceled due to an Run “Auto Setup” again. 21
inappropriate user operation.

E-10:INTERNAL An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 21

ERROR

86 En
 Troubleshooting

After Auto Setup

See
Error message Cause Remedy

INTRODUCTION
page

W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker. 12
message may appear depending on the If they are correct, the speakers work properly even
speakers even when the speakers are when this message is displayed.
connected correctly.

W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft.) area around —
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). the listening position.

PREPARATION
W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all —
speakers is excessive. speakers are placed in a similar environment.

Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 12

We recommended that you use speakers with the —

same or similar specifications.

Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. —

W-4:CHECK PRNS Presence speakers were not detected Check the presence speaker connections and perform 11, 60

OPERATION
during measurement with “Extra Speaker measurement again. If presence speakers are not

BASIC
Assignment” set to “Presence”. connected, set the “Extra Speaker Assignment” to
other than “Presence”.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
APPENDIX
English

87 En
 Glossary
■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-
that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and channel sources.
video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic
video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-
synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. around” effects.

■ Bi-amplification connection ■ Dolby Digital Plus

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for
One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts,
while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray
With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete
frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital
much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously.
sound in some way. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus
■ Component video signal also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.
into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the
chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this ■ Dolby Pro Logic II
system because each of these signals is independent. The component Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right
component input jacks is required in order to output component channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels
signals. instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music
■ Composite video signal sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed game sources.
of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
transmits these three elements combined. Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources.
■ Deep Color There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and
from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. “Game mode” for game sources.
This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from
millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color ■ Dolby Surround
banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser
colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround
shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and
the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a
RGB or YCbCr color space. center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for
special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
■ Dolby Digital sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance
(front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital moving sound effects and directionality.
provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the ■ Dolby TrueHD
system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected
moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering
to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the a high-definition home theater experience.
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1- Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing
channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of
Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range
control.

88 En
 Glossary

■ DSD ■ FLAC
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is
digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals inferior to lossy compression formats in compression rate but provides
are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of higher audio quality.
2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to

INTRODUCTION
reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization ■ HDMI
of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-
can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing
audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver)
dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI
signals input from the HDMI jack. supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-
channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC
■ DTS 96/24 HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi- bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and

PREPARATION
channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with requirements.
all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 that meets the security requirements of content providers and system
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website
video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
video.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
■ DTS Digital Surround This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range

OPERATION
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as
of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the

BASIC
gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in
your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel ■ MP3
sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the
and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression
unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears.

OPERATION
It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11

ADVANCED
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-
channel format. (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.

■ DTS Express ■ MPEG-4 AAC

This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu- An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit
ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for
In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, mobile telephones, portable audio players and other low-capacity
enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the devices requiring high sound quality.
Internet while playing the main program. In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used
to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is supported by

APPENDIX
■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio computers, media servers and many other devices.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including ■ Neural Surround
Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround
this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High sound. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with
kHz audio simultaneously. superior channel separation and localization of audio elements.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround
the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital playback.
Surround.
■ Neo:6
■ DTS-HD Master Audio Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-
developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal
Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression.
audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed
English

This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM
for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
Surround.

89 En
Glossary

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while
the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric
value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that
can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while
the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is
determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher
the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be
played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more
finely the sound level can be reproduced.

■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of
recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does
not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired
compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible
with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression
methods including the ADPCM method.

■ WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high
compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the
human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity
by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to
music CD.

■ “x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors
that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color
space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is
particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.

90 En
 Sound field program information
■ Elements of a sound field ■ SILENT CINEMA
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each

INTRODUCTION
sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows
make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any
surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even
coming straight to our ears from the playerfs instrument.
possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
Early reflections system that does not include a center speaker.

PREPARATION
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms ■ Compressed Music Enhancer
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss
of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of
Reverberations low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance
These are caused by reflections from more than one of the overall sound system.
surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

OPERATION
sonic afterglow. They are nondirectional and lessen the

BASIC
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.

OPERATION
ADVANCED
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening
environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those
of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually
any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will
is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound

APPENDIX
field processor.

■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed
for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having
many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound
heard.
Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP
provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening
room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field
technology combined with various digital audio systems.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the
information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate
height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate
and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening
English

room.

91 En
 Information on HDMI™
■ HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.

Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.

DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc.

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.

Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express

y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio
commentaries mixed down by using the following connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (page 18)
– digital input (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.

Notes
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals
directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD
DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.

Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• 480i/60 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

92 En
 Specifications
AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, • Video Signal Type (Gray Back)
Surround back [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ...................... NTSC
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.08% THD, 8 Ω ...................................... 130 W

INTRODUCTION
[Other models] ......................................................................... PAL
• Dynamic Power (IHF) • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)............................NTSC/PAL
Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω.................................160/200/260/330 W • Signal Level
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) Composite ...................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
[General, China, Korea, Australia and Asia models] S-video [U.K., Europe and Russia models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 175 W ........................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
• Maximum Output Power [U.K, Europe and Russia models] Component ..................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75Ω (Cb/Cr)
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ......................................................... 180 W • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion: Off)
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................................................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more
8 Ω ........................................................................................ 0.9 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more

PREPARATION
• IEC Output Power [U.K, Europe and Russia models] • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.08% THD, 8 Ω .............................. 130 W Component (Video Conversion: Off)
• Damping Factor (IHF) .................................................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
Front Speakers, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω......................... 100 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance FM SECTION
PHONO ................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ • Tuning Range
AV5, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ [U.S.A. and Canada models]............................. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
• Maximum Input Voltage [General and Asia models]..........87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD).................................. 60 mV or more [Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.3 V or more • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)

OPERATION
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance Mono ...................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)
AUDIO OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

BASIC
PRE OUT....................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ Mono/Stereo................................................................74 dB/70 dB
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front Speaker: Small) HD [U.S.A. model] ................................................................80 dB
.................................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
ZONE2/3 OUT ...................................................... 200 mV/1.4 kΩ Mono/Stereo......................................................................0.3/0.3%
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance HD [U.S.A. model] ............................................................... 0.03%
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 100 mV/470 Ω • Antenna Input (unbalanced)....................................................... 75 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV5 to FRONT .................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
AM SECTION

OPERATION
ADVANCED
• RIAA Equalization Deviation • Tuning Range
PHONO ..........................................................................0 ± 0.5 dB [U.S.A. and Canada models]................................ 530 to 1710 kHz
• Total Harmonic Distortion [General and Asia models]................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
PHONO to AUDIO OUT [Other models] ..................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ........................................... 0.02% or less
AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct GENERAL
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)................................. 0.06% or less • Power Supply
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) [U.S.A. and Canada models]................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT) [General model] ................ AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[U.S.A., Canada, General and China models] ......... 86 dB or more

APPENDIX
[China model] ......................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Other models] ......................................................... 81 dB or more [Korea model] ......................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers) [Australia model] .................................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
............................................................................ 100 dB or more [U.K., Europe and Russia models].......................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) [Asia model].....................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Front Speakers ......................................................... 150 µV or less • Power Consumption
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) [U.S.A. and Canada models]................................... 450 W/560 VA
PHONO (Input Shorted) ................................60 dB/55 dB or more [Other models] ..................................................................... 450 W
AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) .........................60 dB/45 dB or more • Standby Power Consumption (reference data)
• Volume Control...................................... Mute / –80 dB to +16.5 dB (HDMI Control/Standby Through/Network Standby: Off,
• Tone Control (Front Speakers) RS232C STBY: No) ................................................ 0.2 W or less
Bass Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB at 50 Hz (HDMI Control/Standby Through/Network Standby: On)
Bass Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz No Repeat................................................................ 5.6 W or less
Treble Boost/Cut................................................. ±10 dB at 20 kHz Repeat.................................................................... 10.6 W or less
Treble Turnover Frequency................................................. 3.5 kHz • Maximum Power Consumption
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) [General and Asia models]................................................... 680 W
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small) • Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 171 x 365 mm
..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct. (17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 14-3/8 in)
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .......................................................... 24 dB/oct. • Weight .................................................................... 12.4 kg (27.4 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

English

93 En
 Index
■ Numerics COMPONENT VIDEO jack ..........................13 ■ G
Connect, Option menu ...................................56
2ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 28 General, troubleshooting ............................... 75
Connecting AM antenna ................................20
5.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10 GEQ, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .............. 61
Connecting audio and video player ................16
6.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10 GND terminal, rear panel ................................ 5
Connecting audio player ................................17
7.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10 GUI Position, Display, Function Setup ......... 63
Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio
7ch Enhancer, sound field program ............... 29
receiver ......................................................18
7ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 29
Connecting external amplifier ........................18 ■ H
Connecting external decoder ..........................18 Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 28
■ A Connecting FM antenna .................................20 Hall in Vienna, sound field program ............. 28
AC IN, rear panel ............................................. 5 Connecting iPod universal dock ....................18 HD indicator, front panel display .................... 6
Account Status, Rhapsody Information, Connecting multi-format player .....................18 HD Radio ....................................................... 33
Function Setup .......................................... 65 Connecting power cable .................................20 HD Radio audio program .............................. 33
Action Game, sound field program ............... 28 Connecting projector ......................................14 HD Radio key, remote control ......................... 7
Adaptive DRC, Volume, Function Setup ...... 63 Connecting set-top box ..................................16 HD Radio reception, troubleshooting ............ 79
Adjusting high frequency sound .................... 25 Connecting SiriusConnect tuner ....................39 HDMI 1-4 jack, rear panel ............................... 5
Adjusting low frequency sound ..................... 25 Connecting speaker ........................................11 HDMI control ................................................ 53
Advanced setup .............................................. 73 Connecting speaker cable ...............................12 HDMI Control, HDMI, Function Setup ........ 62
Adventure, sound field program .................... 27 Connecting to network ...................................19 HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6
All Channel Search mode, Connecting TV monitor .................................14 HDMI information ......................................... 92
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 40 Connecting USB storage device ....................19 HDMI jack ..................................................... 13
All Channel Search mode, Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ......35 HDMI OUT 1/2 jack, rear panel ...................... 5
XM Satellite Radio ................................... 36 Connecting Zone2 ..........................................69 HDMI OUT jack, select ................................. 53
AM antenna connection ................................. 20 Connecting Zone3 ..........................................69 HDMI OUT, remote control ............................ 7
AM tuning ..................................................... 31 Connections ....................................................10 HDMI OUT1, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............ 62
Analog audio jack .......................................... 13 Controlling other component, HDMI OUT2, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............ 62
ANALOG MONITOR OUT, Lipsync, remote control ...........................................72 HDMI THROUGH, front panel ....................... 4
Sound Setup .............................................. 62 Controlling Zone2 ..........................................71 HDMI, Function Setup .................................. 62
ANTENNA terminal, rear panel ...................... 5 Controlling Zone3 ..........................................71 HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 78
Aspect, HDMI, Function Setup ..................... 63 Cursor indicator, front panel display ................6 Headphones, use ............................................ 26
AUDIO 1/2 jack, rear panel ............................. 5 Cursor k/ n/ l/ h, remote control .................7 Hi-fi sound playback ..................................... 25
Audio and video player connection ............... 16 High frequency sound adjustment ................. 25
Audio jack ..................................................... 13 ■ D
Audio Mode, Option menu ............................ 55
Decode Type, DSP Parameter ........................68 ■ I
AUDIO OUT jack, rear panel .......................... 5 INFO, front panel ............................................ 4
Decoder Mode, Option menu .........................54
Audio Output, HDMI, Function Setup .......... 62 INFO, remote control ...................................... 7
Dialogue Lift, DSP Parameter .......................66
Audio player connection ................................ 17 Information, Network, Function Setup .......... 65
DIGITAL AUDIO jack, rear panel ..................5
Audio program, HD Radio ............................ 33 INIT, advanced setup ..................................... 73
Dimension, DSP Parameter ............................68
Auto Preset, Option menu ............................. 55 Initial Delay, DSP Parameter ......................... 66
Dimmer, Display, Function Setup ..................63
Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ........... 86 Initial Volume, Volume, Function Setup ....... 64
Direct number access,
Auto Setup, Speaker Setup ............................ 59 Input Rename, Function Setup ...................... 64
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................40
Automatic setup ............................................. 21 Input selection key, remote control ................. 7
Direct number access, XM Satellite Radio ....36
AV 1-6 jack, rear panel .................................... 5 INPUT selector, front panel ............................. 4
Direct, DSP Parameter ...................................68
AV OUT jack, rear panel ................................. 5 Installing batteries, remote control .................. 6
Disconnect, Option menu ...............................56
Display, Function Setup .................................63 Internal signal flow ........................................ 17
■ B DISPLAY, remote control ...............................7 Internet Radio content playback .................... 50
BAND (CATEGORY), front panel ................. 4 DOCK terminal, rear panel ..............................5 IP Address, Network, Function Setup ........... 64
Bass Crossover Frequency, Manual Setup, Drama, sound field program ..........................28 iPod playback ................................................ 44
Speaker Setup ........................................... 61 DSP Level, DSP Parameter ............................65 iPod universal dock connection ..................... 18
BI AMP, advanced setup ............................... 73 DSP Parameter, Setup menu ..........................65 iPod, troubleshooting ..................................... 83
Bi-amplification connection .......................... 12 Dynamic Range, Sound Setup .......................62 iTunes Tagging, HD Radio ............................ 33
Bluetooth component playback ..................... 46 iTunes Tagging, troubleshooting ................... 80
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ■ E
connection ................................................. 18
Effect Level, DSP Parameter .........................68 ■ L
Bluetooth, troubleshooting ............................ 83 LFE / Bass Out, Manual Setup,
ENTER, remote control ...................................7
EQ Type Select, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................................... 60
■ C Speaker Setup ............................................61 Lipsync, Sound Setup .................................... 62
Category Search mode, Equalizer, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .......61 Liveness, DSP Parameter .............................. 67
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 40 Extended Surround, Option menu ..................54 Low frequency sound adjustment .................. 25
Category Search mode, External amplifier connection ........................18
XM Satellite Radio ................................... 36 External component operation key, remote ■ M
Cellar Club, sound field program .................. 28 control ..........................................................7 MAC Address Filter, Network,
Center Image, DSP Parameter ....................... 68 Extra Speaker Assignment, Manual Setup, Function Setup .......................................... 64
Center Level, DSP Parameter ........................ 68 Speaker Setup ............................................60 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, front panel ................ 4
Center speaker ............................................... 10 Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................ 59
Center Speaker, Manual Setup, ■ F Max Volume, Volume, Function Setup ......... 64
Speaker Setup ........................................... 60 Memory Guard, Setup menu ......................... 68
FM antenna connection ..................................20
Center Width, DSP Parameter ....................... 68 MEMORY, front panel .................................... 4
FM tuning .......................................................31
Chamber, sound field program ...................... 28 MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 73
Frequency tuning ............................................31
Changing information on the front panel MONITOR OUT jack, rear panel .................... 5
Front left speaker ...........................................10
display ....................................................... 26 Mono Movie, sound field program ................ 28
Front panel .......................................................4
CINEMA DSP 3D ......................................... 30 MULTI CH INPUT jack, rear panel ................ 5
Front panel display ...........................................6
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator, Multi information display,
Front Panel Display Scroll, Display,
front panel display ...................................... 6 front panel display ...................................... 6
Function Setup ...........................................63
CINEMA DSP indicator, Multi-format player connection ..................... 18
Front panel display, front panel .......................4
front panel display ...................................... 6 Multi-zone configuration ............................... 69
Front Speaker, Manual Setup,
Clear Preset, Option menu ............................. 55 Music Video, sound field program ................ 28
Speaker Setup ............................................60
COAXIAL jack .............................................. 13 MUTE indicator, front panel display ............... 6
Function Setup, Setup menu ..........................62
CODE SET, remote control ............................. 7 MUTE, remote control .................................... 7

94 En
 Index

Muting audio output .......................................25 Replacing the battery, Sur. Initial Delay, DSP Parameter ................. 66
simplified remote control ............................ 8 Sur. Liveness, DSP Parameter ....................... 67
■ N Resetting remote control code ....................... 72 Sur. Room Size, DSP Parameter ................... 66
Neo:6 Cinema, sound field program ..............29 Resolution, HDMI, Function Setup ............... 63 Surround back left speaker ............................ 10
Neo:6 Music, sound field program .................29 RETURN, remote control ................................ 7 Surround Back Level, DSP Parameter .......... 68
Reverb Delay, DSP Parameter ....................... 67 Surround back right speaker .......................... 10

INTRODUCTION
NET FirmUpdate, advanced setup .................73
Network connection .......................................19 Reverb Level, DSP Parameter ....................... 68 Surround back speaker .................................. 10
NETWORK port, rear panel ............................5 Reverb Time, DSP Parameter ........................ 67 Surround Back Speaker, Manual Setup,
Network Standby, Network, Rhapsody content playback ........................... 51 Speaker Setup ........................................... 60
Function Setup ...........................................65 Rhapsody Free Trial, Rhapsody Information, Surround L Level, DSP Parameter ................ 68
Network, Function Setup ...............................64 Function Setup .......................................... 65 Surround left speaker .................................... 10
Network, trouble shooting ..............................84 Rhapsody Information, Function Setup ......... 65 Surround R Level, DSP Parameter ................ 68
Neural Sur., sound field program ...................29 Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 28 Surround right speaker .................................. 10
Numeric key, remote control ............................7 Room Size, DSP Parameter ........................... 66 Surround Speaker, Manual Setup,
RS232C STBY, advanced setup .................... 73 Speaker Setup ........................................... 60
RS-232C terminal, rear panel .......................... 5
■ O ■ T

PREPARATION
ON SCREEN, remote control ..........................7 ■ S TAG indicator, front panel display ................. 6
Operation range, remote control ......................6
OPTICAL jack ...............................................13 SCENE function ............................................ 24 Test Tone, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ..... 61
OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel .................4 SCENE IR, advanced setup ........................... 73 The Bottom Line, sound field program ......... 28
Option menu ...................................................54 SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4 The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ....... 28
OPTION, remote control ..................................7 SCENE, remote control ................................... 7 Tone control .................................................. 25
OUT 1/OUT 2 indicator, Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 27 TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 4
front panel display .......................................6 Selecting HDMI OUT jack ............................ 53 TRANSMIT, remote control ........................... 7
Selecting source on GUI screen ..................... 25 Transmitting remote control signal ............... 18
Selection SCENE ........................................... 24 TRIGGER OUT 1/2 jack, rear panel ............... 5
■ P Setting Parental Lock, Tuner (FM/AM), troubleshooting ................. 79
P. Initial Delay, DSP Parameter .....................66 SIRIUS Satellite Radio ............................. 42 Tuner indicator, front panel display ................ 6

OPERATION
P. Liveness, DSP Parameter ...........................67 Setting remote control code ........................... 72 Tuner key, remote control ............................... 7

BASIC
P. Room Size, DSP Parameter .......................66 Setting remote control ID .............................. 74 Tuning, AM ................................................... 31
Pairing Bluetooth component .........................46 Set-top box connection .................................. 16 Tuning, FM .................................................... 31
Pairing, Option menu .....................................56 Setup menu .................................................... 57 TUNING/CH l/h ......................................... 4
Panorama, DSP Parameter .............................68 Setup menu, basic operation .......................... 59 Turning off .................................................... 20
Parental Lock, Option menu ..........................55 Shuffle, Option menu ..................................... 55 Turning on ..................................................... 20
PC music content playback ............................48 Sign In, Rhapsody Information, TV control key, remote control ....................... 7
PHONES jack, front panel ...............................4 Function Setup .......................................... 65 TV monitor connection ................................. 14
PHONO jack, rear panel ..................................5 Signal Info, Option menu .............................. 55
Placing speaker ...............................................10 SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 30 ■ U
PLII Game, sound field program ...................29

OPERATION
Simplified remote control ................................ 8

ADVANCED
PLII Movie, sound field program ...................29 Unit, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .............. 61
SIRIUS indicator, front panel display ............. 6 USB FirmUpdate, advanced setup ................ 73
PLII Music, sound field program ...................29 SIRIUS jack, rear panel ................................... 5
PLIIx Game, sound field program .................29 USB port, front panel ...................................... 4
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ....................... 39 USB storage device connection ..................... 19
PLIIx Movie, sound field program .................29 SIRIUS Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ....... 81
PLIIx Music, sound field program .................29 USB storage device playback ........................ 47
SiriusConnect tuner connection ..................... 39 USB, troubleshooting .................................... 84
Power cable connection ..................................20 SLEEP indicator, front panel display .............. 6
POWER, remote control ..................................7 Sleep timer ..................................................... 53
PRE OUT jack, rear panel ................................5 SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7
■ V
Presence L Level, DSP Parameter .................68 Sound field program ...................................... 27 VER, advanced setup .................................... 73
Presence left speaker ......................................11 Sound selection key, remote control ................ 7 VIDEO AUX jack, front panel ........................ 4
Presence R Level, DSP Parameter .................68 Sound Setup, Setup menu .............................. 62 VIDEO jack ................................................... 13

APPENDIX
Presence right speaker ....................................11 SOURCE POWER, remote control ................. 7 Video jack ..................................................... 13
PRESET l/h, front panel ..............................4 Source selection, GUI screen ......................... 25 Video Out, Option menu ............................... 56
Preset Search mode, SP IMP., advanced setup ............................... 73 Video/audio jack ........................................... 13
SIRIUS Satellite Radio ..............................41 Speaker cable connection .............................. 12 Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 30
Preset Search mode, Speaker Configuration, Manual Setup, VOLUME +/-, remote control ......................... 7
XM Satellite Radio ....................................37 Speaker Setup ........................................... 59 VOLUME control, front panel ........................ 4
Preset tuning ...................................................31 Speaker connection ........................................ 11 VOLUME indicator, front panel display ......... 6
Pro Logic, sound field program .....................29 Speaker Distance, Manual Setup, Volume Trim, Option menu .......................... 54
PROGRAM selector, front panel .....................4 Speaker Setup ........................................... 61 Volume, Function Setup ................................ 63
Projector connection .......................................14 Speaker indicator, front panel display ............. 6
PURE DIRECT, front panel .............................4 Speaker layout ............................................... 10 ■ X
Speaker Level, Manual Setup, XM indicator, front panel display ................... 6
■ R Speaker Setup ........................................... 61 XM jack, rear panel ......................................... 5
Rear panel .........................................................5 Speaker placement ......................................... 10 XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock connection ...... 35
Receiving remote control signal .....................18 Speaker Setup, Setup menu ........................... 59 XM Satellite Radio tuning ............................. 35
Refresh, Option menu ....................................56 SPEAKERS terminal, rear panel ..................... 5 XM Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ............. 80
Registering SIRIUS Satellite Radio Specifications ................................................. 93
channel ......................................................41 Spectacle, sound field program ...................... 27 ■ Y
Registering XM Satellite Radio channel ........37 Sports, sound field program ........................... 28
SR PIN, advanced setup ................................ 73 YPAO ............................................................ 21
Remote control .................................................6
Remote control code resetting ........................72 Standard, sound field program ....................... 27
Remote control code setting ...........................72 Standby Through, HDMI, Function Setup .... 62 ■ Z
Remote control ID setting ..............................74 Straight decode mode .................................... 30 ZONE CONTROLS, front panel ..................... 4
Remote control signal transmitter, remote Straight Enhancer, sound field program ........ 29 Zone selection switch, remote control ............. 7
control ..........................................................7 STRAIGHT, front panel .................................. 4 Zone, Function Setup .................................... 64
Sub-input selection key, remote control .......... 7 Zone2 connection .......................................... 69
English

Remote control, troubleshooting ....................82

REMOTE ID, advanced setup ........................73 Subwoofer ...................................................... 10 Zone2 Initial Volume, Zone,
REMOTE IN/OUT jack, rear panel .................5 Subwoofer Phase, Manual Setup, Function Setup .......................................... 64
Remove Account, Rhapsody Information, Speaker Setup ........................................... 61 Zone2 Max Volume, Zone,
Function Setup ...........................................65 Sur. Back Initial Delay, DSP Parameter ........ 66 Function Setup .......................................... 64
Repeat, Option menu ......................................55 Sur. Back Liveness, DSP Parameter .............. 67 ZONE2 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4
Sur. Back Room Size, DSP Parameter .......... 66

95 En
 Index

ZONE2/3 OUT jack, rear panel ....................... 5

ZONE2/ZONE3 indicator,
front panel display ...................................... 6
Zone3 connection .......................................... 69
Zone3 Initial Volume, Zone,
Function Setup .......................................... 64
Zone3 Max Volume, Zone,
Function Setup .......................................... 64
ZONE3 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4

“LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or

“dHDMI” (example) indicates
the name of the parts on the front
panel or the remote control. Refer
to “Part names and functions” on
page 4.

96 En
Information about software THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY CITEL TECHNOLOGIES AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
This product uses the following free software. INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
below. DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CITEL TECHNOLOGIES OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
About curl SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2007, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
All rights reserved.Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
and this permission notice appear in all copies. ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, Copyright (c) 2003 by Marc Boucher, Services Informatiques (MBSI) inc.
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE Copyright (c) 1997, 1998 by Global Election Systems Inc. All rights reserved.
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR Copyright (c) 2001 by Cognizant Pty Ltd.
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that existing copyright notices
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF are retained in all copies and that this notice and the following disclaimer are included
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty fee is required
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN for any of the authorized uses.
THE SOFTWARE. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
Copyright (c) 2004 - 2007 Daniel Stenberg NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
All rights reserved. LOSS OF USE DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
permitted provided that the following conditions are met: ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
conditions and the following disclaimer. Copyright (c) 1993, 1994 The Australian National University. All rights reserved.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
provided with the distribution. documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
3 Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the Australian National
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written University. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products
permission. derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND PURPOSE.
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, Copyright (c) 1989 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University.
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF from this software without specific prior written permission.
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
SUCH DAMAGE. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
About lwip WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Leon Woestenberg <[email protected]> Copyright (c) 1991 Gregory M. Christy. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Axon Digital Design B.V., The Netherlands. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
All rights reserved. copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
permitted provided that the following conditions are met: and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Gregory M. Christy. The name
of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of without specific prior written permission.
conditions and the following disclaimer. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
provided with the distribution. PURPOSE.
3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from Copyright (c) 1995 Eric Rosenquist, Strata Software Limited. http://
this software without specific prior written permission. www.strataware.com/ All rights reserved.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Eric Rosenquist. The name of
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT without specific prior written permission.
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) PURPOSE.
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF Copyright (C) 1990, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the
Copyright (c) 2002 CITEL Technologies Ltd. All rights reserved. “RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are or referencing this software or this function.
permitted provided that the following conditions are met: License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of identified as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest
conditions and the following disclaimer. Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided “AS IS” without express or implied warranty of any kind.
provided with the distribution. These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or
3 Neither the name of CITEL Technologies Ltd nor the names of its contributors may software.
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific Copyright (c) 1989 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
prior written permission. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California,
Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

i
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR About FLAC codec library
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004 Josh Coalson
PURPOSE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
About OpenSSL – Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
LICENSE ISSUES conditions and the following disclaimer.
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL – Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any provided with the distribution.
license issues related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected]. – Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
OpenSSL License be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. prior written permission.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
permitted provided that the following conditions are met: CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
conditions and the following disclaimer. MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
provided with the distribution. LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
following acknowledgment: CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)” ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For About Vorbis library
written permission, please contact [email protected]. Copyright (c) 2001, Xiphophorus
5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
“OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Project. – Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: conditions and the following disclaimer.
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the – Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)” conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY provided with the distribution.
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, – Neither the name of the Xiphophorus nor the names of its contributors may be used to
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE permission.
OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, XEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
SUCH DAMAGE. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
([email protected]). OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
Original SSLeay License POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. Notice for Windows Media DRM
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following The Certified For Windows Vista logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are
conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL and/or other countries.
documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for
except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Windows Media contained in this device (WMDRM) to protect the integrity of
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including
to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given copyright, in such content is not misappropriated.
attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM
textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with Software).
the package. If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised,
owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that Microsoft
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are revoke the WM-DRM Software s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display
permitted provided that the following conditions are met: and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WMDRM Software s
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent
and the following disclaimer. to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also
download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
([email protected])”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are
not cryptographic related :-).
4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps
directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of
this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under
another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

ii
List of remote control codes

Ausind 0249 Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259, Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133,
TV Autovox 0249, 0257, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0225
A.R. Systems 0274 0260, 0328 0268, 0269, 0273, Dux 0271
Acme 0260 Aventura 0097 0274, 0328 Dwin 0224
Acura 0261, 0273 Awa 0327, 0328 CMS 0327 Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274
ADC 0259 Axion 0206 CMS Hightec 0328 Dynex 0181, 0182
Admiral 0100, 0224, 0257, Baird 0328 Coby 0151 Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274,
0258, 0259, 0264, Bang & Olufsen 0230, 0257 Colortyme 0072, 0090 0328
0265 Basic Line 0261, 0262, 0268, Commercial Solutions Elcit 0257
Advent 0204 0273, 0274, 0328 0071 Electa 0270
Adventura 0107 Bastide 0260, 0328 Concerto 0072, 0090 ELECTRO TECH 0261
Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328 Baur 0271, 0274 Concorde 0261, 0273 Electroband 0057, 0101
Agashi 0327, 0328 Bazin 0328 Condor 0243, 0260, 0268, Electrograph 0226
Agazi 0259 Beko 0243, 0269, 0274, 0269, 0273, 0274, Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101,
Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273, 0282, 0351, 0357, 0327 0102
0274, 0327, 0328 0372, 0380 Contec 0225, 0260, 0261, Element 0180
Aim 0274 Belcor 0090 0266, 0273, 0327 Elin 0260, 0268, 0271,
Aiwa 0028, 0297 Bell & Howell 0065, 0100 Contec/Cony 0094, 0104 0273, 0274, 0327
Akai 0063, 0096, 0101, Benq 0051, 0160, 0315 Continental Edison Elite 0262, 0268, 0274
0205, 0231, 0261, Beon 0268, 0271, 0274 0267 Elman 0263
0262, 0268, 0271, Best 0243 Cosmel 0261, 0273 Elta 0261, 0273, 0327
0273, 0274, 0327, Bestar 0243, 0268, 0274 Craig 0104, 0225 Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077,
0328 Binatone 0260, 0328 Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249, 0082, 0085, 0090,
Akiba 0262, 0274 Blue Sky 0262, 0274 0257 0094, 0095, 0097,
Akura 0259, 0262, 0273, Blue Star 0270 Crown 0104, 0225, 0243, 0104, 0105, 0119,
0274 Boots 0260, 0328 0249, 0261, 0268, 0225, 0243, 0257,
Alaron 0327 BPL 0270, 0274 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274
Alba 0243, 0260, 0261, Bradford 0104, 0225 0274 Emprex 0200
0262, 0266, 0269, Brandt 0267, 0272 CS Electronics 0260, 0262, 0327 Envision 0072, 0090, 0096
0271, 0273, 0274, Brillian 0228 CTC Clatronic 0263 Epson 0156, 0201, 0309
0294, 0300, 0327 Brinkmann 0274 CTX 0159 Erres 0268, 0271, 0274
Albatron 0222 Brionvega 0257, 0268, 0271, Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072, ESA 0097
Alcyon 0249 0274 0085, 0088, 0090, ESC 0328
Alleron 0105 Britannia 0260, 0327, 0328 0096, 0099, 0224 Etron 0261
Allorgan 0328 Brockwood 0090 CXC 0104, 0225 Eurofeel 0328
Allstar 0268, 0274 Broksonic 0063, 0225 Cybertron 0262 Euro-Feel 0259
America Action 0225 Bruns 0257 Cytron 0202 Euroline 0271
AMOi 0326 BTC 0262 Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090, Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328
Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275, Bush 0261, 0262, 0264, 0103, 0119, 0245, Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268,
0328 0266, 0268, 0270, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0274
Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0273, 0274, 0281, Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268,
0273, 0274 0282, 0286, 0294, 0285, 0303, 0321, 0274, 0327, 0328
Amtron 0104 0300, 0328, 0329, 0327, 0328, 0344, Expert 0275
Anam 0225, 0261 0351, 0388, 0394, 0361, 0387 Exquisit 0274
Anam National 0102, 0104 0413 Dainichi 0262, 0327 Fenner 0261, 0273
Anglo 0261, 0273 Candle 0072, 0090, 0096, Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271, Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272
Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261, 0107 0274, 0327, 0328 Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274,
0273, 0274 Capsonic 0259 Dantax 0243, 0271 0327
Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261, Carena 0274 Dawa 0274 Filsai 0328
0263, 0273, 0274 Carnivale 0096 Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090, Finlandia 0264
AOC 0072, 0090, 0096, Carrefour 0266 0261, 0273 Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260,
0103 Carver 0088 De Graaf 0264 0263, 0268, 0271,
Apex 0061, 0117, 0139 Cascade 0261, 0273, 0274 Decca 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328
Arcam 0327, 0328 Casio 0317 0274, 0328 FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268
Arcam Delta 0260 Cathay 0268, 0271, 0274 Dell 0167, 0195 Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327,
Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274 CCE 0229, 0328 Denver 0308, 0312 0328
Arthur Martin 0275 Celebrity 0057, 0101 Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274 Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257,
ASA 0257, 0265 Celera 0117 Diamant 0274 0260, 0266, 0269,
Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274 Centurion 0268, 0271, 0274 Diamond 0327 0328
Astra 0261 Century 0257 DiamondVision 0213, 0221 Flint 0268, 0274
Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262, CGE 0243, 0249 Dimensia 0099 Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258,
0327, 0328 Changhong 0117 Disney 0137 0260, 0271, 0327
Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271, Chimei 0323 Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271, Formenti/Phoenix 0327
0274, 0327 Cimline 0261, 0273 0273, 0274, 0328 Fortress 0257, 0258
Atori 0261, 0273 Citizen 0072, 0085, 0090, Dream Vision 0415, 0416 Fraba 0243, 0274
Auchan 0275 0096, 0104 DTS 0261, 0273 Friac 0243
Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261, City 0261, 0273 Dual 0260, 0274, 0328 Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264,
0262, 0268, 0271, Clarion 0225 Dual-Tec 0260, 0261 0265, 0273, 0328
0274, 0328 Clarivox 0271 Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108, Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,
AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328 0257, 0260, 0263, 0105, 0328
Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225 0328 Fujitsu General 0328

iii
Fujitsu Siemens 0425, 0426, 0427, Hinari 0261, 0262, 0266, Kaisui 0260, 0261, 0262, Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090,
0428, 0429 0268, 0271, 0273, 0270, 0273, 0274, 0091, 0095, 0096,
Funai 0033, 0034, 0035, 0274 0327, 0328 0098, 0114, 0115,
0036, 0037, 0097, Hisawa 0262, 0270, 0275 Kamosonic 0260 0129, 0134, 0176,
0104, 0105, 0225, Hisense 0165 Kamp 0260, 0327 0178, 0189, 0210
0259 Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015, Kapsch 0265 Magnum 0259, 0261
Futuretech 0104, 0225 0016, 0042, 0072, Karcher 0243, 0260, 0261, Majestic 0100
Galaxi 0269, 0274 0090, 0094, 0173, 0271, 0274 Mandor 0259
Galaxis 0243, 0274 0254, 0255, 0256, Kawasho 0072, 0090, 0101, Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268,
Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227 0260, 0264, 0265, 0327 0271, 0274, 0328
GBC 0261, 0266, 0273 0266, 0274, 0285, KEC 0225 Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090,
GE 0069, 0071, 0072, 0300, 0319, 0328, Kendo 0243, 0263, 0264, 0096, 0158, 0268,
0073, 0077, 0090, 0348, 0349, 0385, 0274 0271, 0274
0099, 0102, 0106, 0402, 0410 Kenwood 0072, 0090, 0096 Marelli 0257
0112, 0131 Hornyphon 0268, 0274 KIC 0328 Mark 0268, 0271, 0273,
Geant Casino 0275 Hoshai 0262 Kingsley 0260, 0327 0274, 0327, 0328
GEC 0260, 0265, 0268, Huanyu 0260, 0327 KLH 0117 Masuda 0328
0271, 0274, 0328 Hygashi 0260, 0327, 0328 Kloss Novabeam 0104, 0107 Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264,
Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273 Hyper 0260, 0261, 0273, Kneissel 0243, 0250, 0274 0266, 0268, 0271,
General Technic 0261, 0273 0327, 0328 Kolster 0268, 0274 0273, 0274, 0328,
Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268, Hypson 0259, 0260, 0268, Konka 0262 0405
0274 0270, 0271, 0274, Korpel 0268, 0271, 0274 Matsushita 0067
GFM 0177, 0210 0275, 0328 Korting 0243, 0257 Maxent 0193, 0226
Giant 0328 Hyundai 0223 Kosmos 0274 Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274
Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096, Iberia 0274 Koyoda 0261 Medion 0259, 0261, 0274
0108 ICE 0259, 0260, 0261, KTV 0085, 0096, 0104, Megapower 0222
GoldHand 0327 0262, 0268, 0273, 0225, 0229, 0260, Megatron 0072, 0077
Goldline 0274 0274, 0327, 0328 0328 MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327,
GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085, ICeS 0327 Kyoto 0327, 0328 0328
0090, 0094, 0096, Ilo 0198, 0203 Lasat 0243 Melvox 0275
0103, 0243, 0260, IMA 0104 Lenco 0261, 0273 Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077,
0261, 0264, 0268, Imperial 0243, 0249, 0265, Lenoir 0260, 0261, 0273 0100, 0103, 0133,
0271, 0273, 0274, 0268, 0269, 0274 Leyco 0259, 0268, 0271, 0219, 0261, 0273
0327, 0328 Indiana 0268, 0271, 0274 0274 Memphis 0261, 0273
Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261, Infinity 0088 LG 0016, 0038, 0039, Mercury 0273, 0274
0266, 0268, 0271, InFocus 0168, 0277, 0313, 0077, 0103, 0145, Metz 0257
0273, 0274, 0322, 0397, 0430 0222, 0243, 0246, MGA 0072, 0077, 0090,
0328, 0395, 0399, Ingelen 0265 0253, 0260, 0261, 0096, 0103
0412 Ingersol 0261, 0273 0264, 0268, 0271, Micromaxx 0259, 0261
Gorenje 0243, 0269 Initial 0203 0273, 0274, 0282, Microstar 0259, 0261
GPM 0262 Inno Hit 0249, 0260, 0261, 0290, 0299, 0316, Midland 0069, 0071, 0073,
GPX 0211 0262, 0268, 0271, 0327, 0328, 0351, 0076, 0085, 0106,
Gradiente 0162 0273, 0274, 0328 0359, 0367, 0382, 0108
Graetz 0265 Innovation 0259, 0261 0384, 0389, 0396 Minerva 0249
Granada 0249, 0260, 0264, Insignia 0182, 0188, 0190, LG/GoldStar 0246 Minoka 0268, 0274
0266, 0268, 0271, 0209 Liesenk 0271 Mintek 0203
0274, 0275, 0328 Inteq 0076 Liesenkotter 0274 Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,
Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270, Interactive 0243 Life 0259, 0261 0048, 0072, 0077,
0271 Interbuy 0261, 0273 Lifetec 0259, 0261, 0273, 0090, 0103, 0196,
Gronic 0328 Interfunk 0243, 0257, 0265, 0274 0224, 0257, 0266,
Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249, 0268, 0271, 0274 Lloyds 0273 0268, 0274, 0298,
0274, 0356 International 0327 Loewe 0243, 0250, 0274, 0371
Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225 Intervision 0243, 0259, 0260, 0280, 0306, 0347 Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250,
Haier 0187, 0207 0263, 0274, 0328 Loewe Opta 0257, 0268, 0271 0260, 0327, 0328
Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327, Irradio 0249, 0261, 0262, Logik 0100 Monivision 0222
0328 0268, 0271, 0273, Luma 0264, 0271, 0273, Montgomery Ward
Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090 0274 0274 0100
Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328 Isukai 0262, 0274 Lumatron 0264, 0268, 0271, Motion 0249
Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260, ITC 0260, 0328 0274, 0328 Motorola 0102, 0224
0261, 0266, 0268, ITS 0262, 0268, 0270, Lux May 0268 MTC 0072, 0090, 0096,
0271, 0273, 0274, 0274, 0327 Luxman 0072, 0090 0103, 0243, 0327
0328 ITT 0261, 0265 Luxor 0260, 0264, 0328 Multi System 0271
Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274 ITV 0261, 0271, 0274 LXI 0061, 0065, 0071, Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229,
Hantor 0274 Janeil 0107 0072, 0073, 0077, 0243, 0260, 0261,
Harman/Kardon 0088 JBL 0088 0088, 0099 0263, 0264, 0266,
Harvard 0104, 0225 JC Penney 0072, 0073, 0085, M Electronic 0260, 0261, 0265, 0271, 0273, 0274,
Harwood 0273, 0274 0090, 0099, 0103, 0267, 0268, 0271 0327, 0328
Havermy 0224 0106 MAG 0050 Murphy 0260, 0327
HCM 0259, 0260, 0261, JCB 0057, 0101 Magnadyne 0257, 0263, 0271 NAD 0061, 0072, 0077
0270, 0273, 0274, Jensen 0072, 0090 Magnafon 0249, 0260, 0263, Naonis 0264
0328 JVC 0017, 0018, 0019, 0327 NEC 0026, 0053, 0072,
Hema 0273, 0328 0092, 0093, 0094, 0090, 0096, 0102,
Hewlett Packard 0146 0106, 0251, 0252, 0103, 0266, 0328
Higashi 0327 0266, 0268, 0293,
HiLine 0274 0360, 0379

iv
Neckermann 0243, 0257, 0260, 0114, 0135, 0143, RCA 0071, 0072, 0073, SEI-Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0265
0264, 0268, 0269, 0176, 0178, 0189, 0074, 0075, 0090, Seleco 0264, 0265, 0266
0271, 0274, 0328 0210, 0212, 0232, 0099, 0102, 0103, Sencora 0261, 0273
NEI 0268, 0271, 0274 0233, 0257, 0260, 0109, 0120, 0179, Sentra 0273
Net-TV 0226 0268, 0271, 0274, 0218 Serino 0327
Neufunk 0273, 0274 0278, 0287, 0301, Realistic 0065, 0077, 0096, Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,
New Tech 0261, 0268 0302, 0307, 0311, 0225 0072, 0080, 0081,
New World 0262 0314, 0330, 0331, Recor 0274 0082, 0083, 0085,
NewTech 0273, 0274, 0328 0333, 0337, 0338, Redstar 0274 0090, 0094, 0110,
Nicamagic 0260, 0327 0339, 0341, 0343, Reflex 0274 0148, 0183, 0216,
Nikkai 0259, 0260, 0262, 0345, 0355, 0363, Revox 0243, 0268, 0271, 0224, 0247, 0248,
0268, 0271, 0273, 0365, 0377, 0378, 0274 0258, 0266, 0288,
0274, 0327, 0328 0381, 0383, 0406, Rex 0259, 0264, 0265 0304, 0324, 0325,
Nikko 0072, 0077, 0096 0409, 0414 RFT 0243, 0250, 0257 0340, 0358, 0362,
Nobliko 0249, 0260, 0263, Philips Magnavox 0089, 0114, 0115 Rhapsody 0327 0369, 0386, 0392,
0327 Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268, R-Line 0268, 0271, 0274 0398, 0400, 0401,
Nokia 0265 0271, 0274, 0327 Roadstar 0259, 0261, 0262, 0403
Norcent 0155 Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271, 0273 Sheng Chia 0224
Nordic 0328 0274, 0327 Robotron 0257 Shogun 0090
Nordmende 0257, 0265, 0267, Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096 Rowa 0327, 0328 Siarem 0257, 0263, 0274
0268 Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072, Royal Lux 0243 Sierra 0268, 0274
Nordvision 0271 0090, 0243, 0265, RTF 0257 Siesta 0243
Novatronic 0274 0267, 0268, 0271, Runco 0076, 0096, 0108 Signature 0100
Oceanic 0265, 0275 0274, 0408 Saba 0257, 0265, 0267, Silva 0327
Okano 0243, 0269, 0274 Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273, 0272, 0376 Silver 0266
Olevia 0052, 0140, 0149, 0274 Saisho 0259, 0260, 0261, Singer 0257, 0263, 0275
0154, 0157 Playsonic 0328 0273, 0328 Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0271,
ONCEAS 0260 Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184, Salora 0264, 0265 0274
Onwa 0104, 0225 0220 Sambers 0249, 0263 Skantic 0265
Opera 0274 Poppy 0261, 0273 Sampo 0072, 0085, 0090, Solavox 0265
Oppo 0208 Portland 0072, 0085, 0090, 0096, 0226 Sonitron 0243, 0328
Optimus 0065, 0067 0103 Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031, Sonoko 0259, 0260, 0261,
Optoma 0194 Prandoni-Prince 0249, 0264 0032, 0044, 0045, 0268, 0271, 0273,
Optonica 0224 Precision 0260, 0328 0046, 0047, 0072, 0274, 0328
Orbit 0268, 0274 Prima 0161, 0207, 0261, 0077, 0084, 0085, Sonolor 0265, 0275
Orion 0121, 0192, 0261, 0265, 0273 0086, 0087, 0090, Sontec 0243, 0268, 0271,
0268, 0271, 0273, Princeton 0222 0094, 0096, 0103, 0274
0274, 0282, 0329 Prism 0069, 0106 0118, 0217, 0229, Sony 0041, 0057, 0058,
Orline 0274 Profex 0261, 0273 0235, 0236, 0237, 0059, 0060, 0101,
Osaki 0259, 0260, 0262, Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274 0243, 0259, 0260, 0116, 0125, 0126,
0274, 0328 Proline 0268, 0274 0261, 0268, 0269, 0127, 0142, 0169,
Oso 0262 Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099 0271, 0273, 0274, 0170, 0171, 0172,
Otto Versand 0258, 0260, 0266, Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271, 0284, 0295, 0327, 0174, 0234, 0261,
0268, 0270, 0271, 0274, 0327, 0328 0328, 0336, 0346, 0266, 0276, 0289,
0274, 0328 Protech 0259, 0260, 0261, 0390, 0407 0292, 0393, 0411
Pael 0260, 0327 0263, 0268, 0271, Sandra 0260, 0327, 0328 Sound & Vision 0262, 0263
Palladium 0243, 0260, 0269, 0328 Sansui 0063, 0121, 0268, Soundesign 0072, 0077, 0090,
0274, 0328 Proton 0072, 0077, 0090, 0274 0104, 0105, 0225
Palsonic 0328 0094 Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022, Soundwave 0268, 0271, 0274
Panama 0259, 0260, 0261, Protron 0150 0049, 0065, 0090, Squareview 0097
0273, 0274, 0327, PROVIEW 0050, 0164 0141, 0191, 0243, SSS 0090, 0104, 0225
0328 Provision 0271, 0274 0250, 0260, 0266, Standard 0260, 0261, 0262,
Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0066, Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108 0273, 0291, 0327, 0268, 0273, 0274,
0067, 0068, 0069, Pye 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328, 0370, 0373, 0328
0070, 0102, 0106, 0296, 0338 0391 Starlite 0104, 0225, 0271,
0113, 0147, 0215, Pymi 0261, 0273 SBR 0271, 0274 0273, 0274
0241, 0265, 0274, Quandra Vision 0275 Sceptre 0166, 0185 Stenway 0270
0279, 0310, 0332, Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102, Schaub Lorenz 0265 Stern 0264, 0265
0334, 0368, 0374 0106 Schneider 0260, 0262, 0268, Strato 0273, 0274
Panavision 0274 Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0287, Stylandia 0328
Pathe Cinema 0243, 0250, 0260, 0271, 0274, 0328 0300, 0328, 0364, Sunkai 0261
0275, 0327 Questa 0266 0366 Sunstar 0273, 0274
Pausa 0261, 0273 Radialva 0274 Scotch 0072, 0077 Sunwood 0261, 0268, 0273,
Penney 0061, 0069, 0071, RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077, Scott 0072, 0077, 0090, 0274
0077, 0096 0096, 0225, 0274 0094, 0104, 0105, Superla 0260, 0327, 0328
Perdio 0274, 0327 RadioShack/Realistic 0199, 0225 Superscan 0095, 0224
Perfekt 0274 0072, 0085, 0090, Sears 0061, 0065, 0071, SuperTech 0273, 0274, 0327
Philco 0072, 0088, 0090, 0094, 0099, 0104 0072, 0073, 0077, Supra 0261, 0273
0091, 0094, 0096, Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274, 0088, 0090, 0097, Supre-Macy 0107
0102, 0103, 0243, 0328 0099, 0105 Supreme 0057, 0101
0249, 0257, 0274 Radiomarelli 0257, 0274 SEG 0259, 0260, 0263, Susumu 0262
Philharmonic 0260, 0328 Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273, 0266, 0271, 0273, Sutron 0261, 0273
Philips 0040, 0088, 0089, 0274 0274, 0300, 0327, SVA 0197
0090, 0091, 0094, Rank 0266 0328 Sydney 0260, 0327, 0328
0098, 0099, 0102, SEI 0274

v
Sylvania 0072, 0088, 0089, Triumph 0274 Adventura 1023 Dumont 1072, 1078
0090, 0091, 0095, Uher 0243, 0249, 0265, Adyson 1090 Durabrand 1032
0096, 0097, 0098, 0268, 0274 Aiwa 1023, 1072, 1073, Dynatech 1023
0175, 0177, 0210 Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263, 1074 Echostar 1064
Symphonic 0097, 0104, 0108, 0274, 0327 Akai 1071, 1073 Elbe 1091
0133, 0210, 0225 Unic Line 0274 Akiba 1079, 1090 Elcatech 1090
Syntax 0149 United 0271 Akura 1073, 1079, 1090 Electrohome 1021
Syntax-Brillian 0149 Universum 0243, 0249, 0259, Alba 1074, 1075, 1076, Electrophonic 1021
Sysline 0271 0268, 0269, 0271, 1079, 1090, 1091 Elsay 1090
Sytong 0327 0274, 0328 Alienware 1066 Elta 1079, 1090, 1091
Tandy 0224, 0258, 0260, Univox 0274 Ambassador 1076 Emerson 1021, 1022, 1023,
0262, 0265, 0328 Vector Research 0096 American High 1022 1070, 1090
Tashiko 0260, 0264, 0266, Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268, Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091 ESC 1075, 1091
0327, 0328 0269, 0271, 0274, Anitech 1079, 1090 Etzuko 1079, 1090
Tatung 0102, 0227, 0260, 0328 Apex 1010 Expressvu 1064
0268, 0271, 0274, Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273, ASA 1077, 1078 Ferguson 1073
0328 0274 Asha 1020 Fidelity 1072, 1090
TCM 0259, 0261 Victor 0093, 0266, 0268 Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078, Finlandia 1078
Teac 0274, 0328 VIDEOLOGIC 0327 1079, 1090 Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078
Tec 0260, 0261, 0273, Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327, Audio Dynamics 1018 Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079,
0328 0328 Audiosonic 1091 1090
Technics 0067, 0069, 0106 VideoSystem 0268, 0274 Audiovox 1021 Fisher 1019
TechniSat 0320, 0417, 0418, Videotechnic 0327, 0328 Baird 1072, 1073, 1075, Flint 1074
0419 Vidikron 0088 1091 Formenti/Phoenix 1078
Techwood 0069, 0072, 0090, Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090, Bang & Olufsen 1067 Frontech 1076
0106 0103 Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076, Fuji 1022
TEDELEX 0328 Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226, 1079, 1090, 1091 Fujitsu 1072
Teknika 0072, 0085, 0088, 0318 Baur 1078 Funai 1023, 1072
0090, 0094, 0100, Viking 0107 Beaumark 1020 Galaxy 1072
0103, 0104, 0105, Viore 0198 Bell & Howell 1019 Garrard 1023
0225 Visiola 0260, 0327 Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091 Gateway 1066
Teleavia 0267 Vision 0268, 0274, 0328 Black Panther Line GBC 1076, 1079
Telecor 0274, 0328 Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160, 1075, 1091 GE 1020, 1022
Telefunken 0267, 0268, 0272, 0227, 0420, 0421, Blaupunkt 1078 GEC 1078
0274 0422, 0423, 0424 Bondstec 1076, 1090 Geloso 1079
Telegazi 0274 Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274 Broksonic 1054 General 1076
Telemeister 0274 Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264, Bush 1074, 1075, 1079, General Technic 1074
Telesonic 0274 0265, 0268, 0274 1090, 1091, 1097, GOI 1064
Telestar 0274 Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328 1099, 1109, 1139 GoldHand 1079, 1090
Teletech 0261, 0271, 0273, Wards 0072, 0077, 0088, Calix 1021 Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072,
0274 0090, 0091, 0096, Candle 1020, 1021 1077
Teleton 0260, 0328 0098, 0099, 0100, Canon 1022 Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076,
Televideon 0327 0103, 0105 Cathay 1091 1077, 1079, 1090,
Televiso 0275 Watson 0268, 0271, 0274 Catron 1076 1091
Tensai 0261, 0262, 0268, Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327 CGE 1072, 1073 Gradiente 1023
0273, 0274, 0328 Waycon 0061 Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090 Graetz 1073
Tesmet 0268 Wega 0257, 0266, 0274 CineVision 1058 Granada 1078
Tevion 0259, 0261 Wegavox 0273 Citizen 1020, 1021 Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076,
Texet 0260, 0273, 0327, Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274, Clatronic 1076, 1090 1077, 1079, 1090,
0328 0328 Colortyme 1018 1091
Thomson 0238, 0239, 0240, Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142 Condor 1075, 1076, 1091 Grundig 1078, 1079
0260, 0267, 0268, White Westinghouse Craig 1020, 1021 Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091
0272, 0274, 0335 0008, 0119, 0260, Crown 1075, 1076, 1079, Harley Davidson 1023
Thorn 0271, 0274 0263, 0271, 0274, 1090, 1091 Harman/Kardon 1018
TMK 0072, 0077, 0090 0327 Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022 Harwood 1090
TNCi 0076 Wincom 0055, 0056 Cybernex 1020 HCM 1079, 1090
Tokai 0268, 0274, 0328 Xrypton 0274 CyberPower 1066 Headquarter 1019
Tokyo 0260, 0327 Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002, Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076, Hewlett Packard 1066
Tomashi 0270 0003, 0004, 0005, 1091, 1116, 1141 Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090,
Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053, 0072, 0090, 0096, Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091 1091
0054, 0061, 0062, 0103 Dantax 1074 Hisawa 1074
0063, 0064, 0065, Yamishi 0274, 0328 Daytron 1075, 1091 Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078,
0122, 0123, 0124, Yokan 0274 DBX 1018 1089, 1108, 1124
0128, 0130, 0132, Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260, De Graaf 1078 HNS 1060
0139, 0214, 0244, 0261, 0262, 0268, Decca 1072, 1073, 1078 Howard Computers
0266, 0283, 0305, 0271, 0273, 0274, Dell 1066 1066
0328, 0329, 0342, 0327, 0328 Denko 1090 HP 1066
0350, 0352, 0353, Yorx 0262 DiamondVision 1050 HTS 1064
0354, 0375, 0404 Zanussi 0264, 0328 DigiFusion 1092 Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061
Totevision 0085 Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078, DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040, Hughes Network Systems
Towada 0265, 0328 0079, 0090, 0100, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1038, 1060
Trakton 0328 0108, 0111 1065 Humax 1035, 1060, 1094
Trans Continens 0274, 0328 Dish Network 1064 Hush 1066
Transtec 0327 VCR Dishpro 1064 Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090,
Trident 0328 ABS 1066 Dual 1073, 1078, 1091 1091

vi
iBUYPOWER 1066 Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072, Ricavision 1066 Telefunken 1073
Impego 1076 1076, 1078, 1079, Roadstar 1075, 1077, 1079, Teletech 1090, 1091
Imperial 1072 1090 1090, 1091 Tenosal 1079, 1090
Inno Hit 1075, 1076, 1078, Murphy 1072 Royal 1090 Tensai 1072, 1077, 1079,
1079, 1090, 1091 NEC 1018, 1019, 1073 Runco 1032 1090
Innovation 1074 Neckermann 1073, 1078 Saba 1073 Tevion 1074
Instant Replay 1022 NEI 1078 Saisho 1074, 1079 Thomson 1073, 1087
Interbuy 1077, 1090 Nesco 1079, 1090 Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038, Thorn 1073
Interfunk 1078 Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091 1040, 1046, 1060, Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037,
Intervision 1072, 1091 Nikko 1021 1080, 1107, 1110, 1039, 1040, 1060,
Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090 Niveus Media 1066 1112, 1121, 1123, 1061, 1062
ITT 1073 Noblex 1020 1140, 1142 TMK 1020
ITV 1075, 1077, 1091 Nokia 1073, 1091 Samurai 1076, 1090 Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090
JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020, Nordmende 1073 Sanky 1032 Tonsai 1079
1021, 1022 Northgate 1066 Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069, Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034,
JCL 1022 Oceanic 1072, 1073 1073 1051, 1063, 1066,
JVC 1011, 1012, 1013, Okano 1074, 1090, 1091 Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114 1073, 1078, 1086,
1014, 1015, 1016, Olympus 1022 Saville 1091 1099, 1102, 1119,
1017, 1018, 1019, Optimus 1021 SBR 1078 1144
1028, 1035, 1064, Orion 1033, 1069, 1074, Schaub Lorenz 1072, 1073 Totevision 1020, 1021
1073, 1085, 1117, 1097, 1139 Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075, Touch 1066
1130, 1131, 1133, Orson 1072 1076, 1077, 1078, Towada 1079, 1090
1134, 1135, 1136 Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079, 1079, 1090, 1091 Towika 1079, 1090
Kaisui 1079, 1090 1090 Sears 1019, 1021, 1022 TVA 1076
Karcher 1078 Otto Versand 1078 SEG 1079, 1090, 1091 Uher 1077
Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076, Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079, SEI-Sinudyne 1078 UltimateTV 1065
1090 1090 Seleco 1073 Ultravox 1091
Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073 Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009, Sentra 1076, 1090 Unitech 1020
Kodak 1021, 1022 1022, 1026, 1042, Sentron 1079, 1090 United Quick Star 1075, 1091
Korpel 1079, 1090 1043, 1068, 1082, Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057, Universum 1072, 1077, 1078
Kyoto 1090 1101, 1126, 1132 1081, 1115, 1137 Vector Research 1018
Lenco 1075 Pathe Marconi 1073 Shintom 1079, 1090 Video Concepts 1018
Leyco 1079, 1090 Perdio 1072 Shivaki 1077 Videon 1074
LG 1021, 1053, 1072, Philco 1022, 1090 Shogun 1020 Videosonic 1020
1077, 1088, 1100, Philips 1022, 1030, 1035, Siemens 1077 Viewsonic 1066
1106, 1125, 1143 1038, 1039, 1040, Silva 1077 Voodoo 1066
Lifetec 1074 1044, 1055, 1060, Silver 1091 Wards 1020, 1021, 1022,
Linksys 1066 1078, 1084, 1095, Singer 1022 1023
Lloyd’s 1023 1096, 1104, 1105, Sinudyne 1078 Weltblick 1077
Loewe Opta 1077, 1078 1111, 1113, 1122, Solavox 1076 XR-1000 1022, 1023
Logik 1079, 1090 1124, 1127, 1128, Sonic Blue 1041, 1068 Yamaha 1018, 1019
Lumatron 1075, 1091 1129 Sonneclair 1090 Yamishi 1079, 1090
Luxor 1090 Philips Magnavox 1030 Sonoko 1075, 1091 Yokan 1079, 1090
LXI 1021 Phonola 1078 Sontec 1077 Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079,
M Electronic 1072 Pilot 1021 Sony 1000, 1001, 1002, 1090
Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044, Pioneer 1078, 1118 1003, 1024, 1027, Zenith 1032
1070 Polaroid 1010, 1049 1036, 1062, 1066, ZT Group 1066
Magnin 1021 Portland 1075, 1076, 1091 1083, 1098, 1103,
Manesth 1079, 1090 Prinz 1072 1138 DVD
Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022, Profex 1079 Stack 1066 4Kus 2097
1078 Proline 1072 Stack 9 1066 Accurian 2220
Mark 1091 Proscan 1065 Standard 1075, 1091 Advent 2169, 2201
Marta 1021 Prosonic 1074, 1091 Stern 1091 AEG 2312
Matsui 1074, 1077 Pulsar 1032 STS 1022 Airis 2318
Matsushita 1022 Pye 1052, 1078 Sunkai 1074 Aiwa 2272
Media Center PC 1066 Quarter 1019 Sunstar 1072 Akai 2170, 2195, 2225,
Mediator 1078 Quartz 1019 Suntronic 1072 2227
Medion 1074 Quasar 1022 Sunwood 1079, 1090 Akura 2310
MEI 1022 Quelle 1072, 1078 Superscan 1070 Alba 2018, 2232, 2247,
Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021, Radialva 1090 Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044, 2259, 2264
1022, 1023, 1032, RadioShack 1021 1052, 1070 Alco 2199
1048, 1069, 1072, RadioShack/Realistic Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090 Alize 2315
1077 1019, 1020, 1021, Systemax 1066 Allegro 2215
Memphis 1079, 1090 1022, 1023 Tagar Systems 1066 Amitech 2312
MGN Technology 1020 Radiola 1078 Taisho 1074 Amphion MediaWorks
Micromaxx 1074 Radix 1021 Tandberg 1091 2145
Microsoft 1066 Randex 1021 Tandy 1019 AMW 2145, 2313
Microstar 1074 RCA 1020, 1022, 1025, Tashiko 1021, 1072 Apex 2044, 2045, 2046,
Migros 1072 1035, 1040, 1047, Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078 2047, 2076, 2208,
Mind 1066 1060, 1065 TCM 1074, 1093, 1120 2209
Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078 Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021, Teac 1023, 1091 Apple 2163
Motorola 1022 1022, 1023 Tec 1076, 1090, 1091 Arrgo 2216
MTC 1020 ReplayTV 1041, 1068 Technics 1022 Asono 2318
Rex 1073 Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023 Aspire 2140, 2202
RFT 1076, 1078, 1090 Teleavia 1073 Astar 2162

vii
ATACOM 2318 Enzer 2302 LG 2080, 2107, 2115, 2252, 2256, 2260,
Audiovox 2111, 2199 Epson 2165 2116, 2141, 2188, 2268, 2282, 2332,
Avious 2317 ESA 2219 2211, 2215, 2237, 2333, 2343, 2344,
Awa 2313 Finlux 2304, 2312, 2317 2239, 2285, 2293, 2345, 2367, 2371,
Axion 2171 Fintec 2299 2295, 2348, 2370 2373, 2380, 2382,
Bang & Olufsen 2210 Fisher 2212 Life 2228 2385
Baze 2317 Funai 2219 Lifetec 2228 Phonotrend 2317
BBK 2318 Gateway 2097 Limit 2305 Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014,
Bellagio 2313 GE 2079, 2206, 2209 Liquid Video 2204 2063, 2064, 2065,
Best Buy 2309 Gericom 2269 Liteon 2097, 2121, 2220 2066, 2067, 2113,
Blaupunkt 2209 GFM 2176 Loewe 2274 2134, 2207, 2230,
Blue Parade 2207 Giec 2300 LogicLab 2305 2236, 2265, 2266,
Boghe 2300 Global Solutions
2305 Magnavox 2075, 2096, 2178, 2267, 2297, 2322,
Brainwave 2312 Global Sphere 2305 2180, 2196, 2205, 2351, 2352, 2353,
Brandt 2198, 2238 Go Video 2135, 2215 2219, 2308 2354, 2355, 2356,
Broksonic 2192, 2195 Goodmans 2247, 2289, 2298, Magnex 2317 2357, 2358, 2359,
Bush 2018, 2060, 2248, 2300, 2308, 2330, Majestic 2314 2377
2264, 2301, 2308, 2369 Marantz 2282 Pointer 2312
2317, 2350, 2368 GPX 2177 Marquant 2312 Polaroid 2047, 2133, 2185
California Audio Labs Gradiente 2197 Matsui 2198, 2296 Portland 2312
2197 Graetz 2302 McIntosh 2149 Powerpoint 2313
Cambridge Audio 2304 Greenhill 2209 Mecotek 2312 Prima 2174
CAT 2306, 2307 Grundig 2271 Medion 2228 Proceed 2208
CAVS 2146 Grunkel 2312, 2316 Memorex 2078, 2184, 2195 Proscan 2206
Centrum 2307 GVG 2299 MiCO 2300, 2304 Prosonic 2299, 2314
CGV 2304, 2312 H&B 2308 Micromaxx 2228 Protron 2152
Changhong 2222 H_her 2318 Microsoft 2206 Provision 2308
Cinetec 2313 Haaz 2304, 2305 Microstar 2228 Pye 2194
CineVision 2191, 2215 Haier 2172 Minoka 2312 Qwestar 2198
Clatronic 2308, 2317 Harman/Kardon 2125, 2213 Minowa 2317 Raite 2302
Coby 2077, 2124, 2314 HiMAX 2309 Mintek 2167, 2209 RCA 2058, 2059, 2071,
Conia 2301 Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108, Mitsubishi 2081 2079, 2183, 2199,
Continental Edison 2302, 2309, 2320, Mizuda 2308, 2309 2206, 2207, 2209
2313 2366 Monyka 2302 RedStar 2310, 2312, 2314
Crown 2312 Hiteker 2208 Mustek 2232 Regent 2203
C-Tech 2305 Home Tech Industries Mx Onda 2304 Reoc 2305
Curtis Mathes 2217 2318 Mystral 2316 Rimax 2315
CVG 2299 Hyundai 2316 Naiko 2312 Rio 2215
CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216, Ilo 2167 Nesa 2209 Roadstar 2281, 2308
2233, 2258 Initial 2167, 2209 Neufunk 2302 Ronin 2313
Cytron 2166 Innovation 2228 Nevir 2312 Rotel 2153
Daenyx 2313 Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219 Next Base 2221 Rowa 2200, 2301
Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280, Integra 2207 Nexxtech 2161 Rownsonic 2307
2299, 2312, 2313, Irradio 2103 NU-TEC 2301 Saba 2198, 2238
2326, 2376 iSymphony 2164 Onkyo 2205, 2290 Sabaki 2305
Daewoo International JBL 2213 Oopla 2097 Saivod 2312
2313 JVC 2049, 2050, 2051, Oppo 2150, 2173 Sampo 2223
Dalton 2311 2052, 2053, 2054, Optim 2303 Samsung 2031, 2032, 2033,
Dansai 2303, 2312 2055, 2056, 2057, Optimus 2230 2034, 2035, 2082,
Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313 2070, 2242, 2261, Orava 2308 2127, 2137, 2138,
Dayton 2313 2275, 2276, 2277, Orbit 2313 2154, 2182, 2197,
DEC 2308 2278, 2339, 2340, Orion 2027, 2060 2283, 2319, 2325,
Decca 2312 2341, 2342, 2386, Oritron 2198, 2204 2346, 2347, 2349,
Denon 2105, 2147, 2197, 2387, 2389, 2390, P&B 2308 2372, 2381
2286 2391 Pacific 2305 Sansui 2027, 2195, 2304,
Denver 2288, 2308, 2310, Jwin 2148 Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017, 2305, 2312
2314 Kansai 2314 2036, 2037, 2038, Sanyo 2139, 2195, 2212,
Denzel 2302 Kawasaki 2199 2039, 2040, 2041, 2374
Desay 2159 Kennex 2312 2042, 2043, 2074, ScanMagic 2232
Diamond 2304, 2305 Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270 2089, 2104, 2108, Schaub Lorenz 2312
DiamondVision 2179, 2186 KeyPlug 2312 2112, 2120, 2131, Schneider 2226
Disney 2078, 2088 Kiiro 2312 2132, 2197, 2205, Scientific Labs 2305
DK Digital 2257 Kingavon 2308 2244, 2245, 2246, Scott 2243, 2311
Dmtech 2226 Kiss 2302 2253, 2254, 2255, Seeltech 2318
Dual 2302 KLH 2199, 2209 2292, 2321, 2324, SEG 2240, 2302, 2305,
Durabrand 2218 Koda 2308 2327, 2328, 2329, 2313
DVX 2305 Koss 2095, 2198, 2204 2331, 2383, 2388 Sharp 2009, 2010, 2084,
Easy Home 2309 KXD 2309 Parasound 2151 2122, 2142, 2143,
Eclipse 2304 Landel 2221 peeKTON 2318 2144, 2181, 2190,
E-Dem 2318 Lasonic 2214 Philips 2026, 2061, 2062, 2228, 2262, 2375
Electrohome 2312 Lawson 2305 2075, 2090, 2094, Shinsonic 2167
Elin 2312 Lecson 2303 2096, 2097, 2103, Sigmatek 2309, 2318
Elta 2263, 2312, 2315 Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317 2110, 2126, 2180, Silva 2310
Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219 Lenoxx 2203, 2218 2193, 2205, 2231, Singer 2304, 2305
Enterprise 2211 2235, 2241, 2251, Skymaster 2279, 2305

viii
 U

RX-V2065
The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual.

■ Front panel

A BC D E F G H I J K

HDMI THROUGH

VOLUME

ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE BAND

ON/OFF ON/OFF CONTROLS INFO l PRESET h MEMORY CATEGORY l TUNING/CH h

SCENE

BD/DVD TV CD RADIO

PROGRAM INPUT
MAIN ZONE
VIDEO AUX
PHONES USB TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT OPTIMIZER MIC

ON/OFF

SILENT CINEMA EFFECT

VIDEO AUDIO HDMI IN

L M N O P Q R S T U V
■ Remote control

a n
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE 3 TRANSMIT CODE SET
b o
POWER POWER

c SOURCE SLEEP p
HDMI
1 2 3 4

AV
q
1 2 3 4

AUDIO
d 5 6 1 2
HDMI
V-AUX PHONO MULTI DOCK
USB/NET
TUNER SIRIUS XM

CATEGORY
e FM AM
PRESET TUN./CH

f INFO MEMORY

ENHANCER SUR. DECODE

MUSIC STEREO

HDMI OUT STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT r

g MOVIE

SCENE

h BD
DVD TV CD RADIO

ON SCREEN OPTION
s
i

j ENTER VOLUME
t
RETURN DISPLAY

TOP POP-UP MUTE

u
MENU MENU

k REC v
TAG PRG SELECT
w
USB NET RADIO PC RHAPSODY
1 2 3 4 x
l 5 6 7 8

9 0 10 ENT

TV
INPUT POWER

m TV VOL TV CH
MUTE

Printed in Malaysia WS30800

Skyworth 2310 Woxter 2315, 2318 Alcatel 3066 Movie Time 3031, 3063
Slim Art 2312 Xbox 2206, 2229 Americast 3046 Mr Zapp 3055
SM Electronic 2305 Xlogic 2305, 2312 Amstrad 3048, 3068 Multichoice 3057
Sonic Blue 2215 XMS 2312 Antronix 3019, 3020 Multitech 3045
Sontech 2316 Xoro 2300 Archer 3020 NEC 3018
Sony 2005, 2006, 2007, Yamada 2097, 2313, 2315 Arcon 3048 NET Brazil 3007
2020, 2021, 2022, Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2002, AT&T 3013 Nokia 3051
2023, 2024, 2025, 2003, 2011, 2018, Axis 3048 Noos 3055
2069, 2072, 2073, 2019, 2036, 2106, Bell South 3046 NSC 3031
2085, 2086, 2087, 2197, 2273 Cable Vision 3014 Oak 3024
2091, 2092, 2093, Yamakawa 2302, 2313 Cabletenna 3019 Pace 3011, 3043, 3084
2102, 2128, 2129, Yukai 2232 Cabletime 3058 Palladium 3049
2130, 2249, 2250, Zenith 2080, 2141, 2205, Cableview 3005 Panasonic 3034, 3036, 3040
2323, 2334, 2335, 2211, 2215 Clearmaster 3045 Paragon 3040
2336, 2360, 2361, ClearMax 3045 Philips 3021, 3022, 3029,
2362, 2363, 2364, Blu-ray Disc Clyde Cablevision 3049, 3053, 3054,
2365, 2384 LG 2115 3059 3055
Soundmaster 2305 Panasonic 2089, 2131, 2132 Colour Voice 3022 Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038,
Soundmax 2305 Pioneer 2134 Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039 3042, 3048, 3083,
Spectra 2313 Samsung 2035, 2127 Comcrypt 3057 3084
Spectroniq 2155 Sharp 2142, 2143, 2144 Comtronics 3023 Popular Mechanics
Standard 2305 Sony 2025 Contec 3024 3044
Star Cluster 2305 Yamaha 2018 Coolmax 3045 Proscan 3015, 3016
Starmedia 2308, 2318 COX 3006 Pulsar 3040
Sungale 2158 DVR Cryptovision 3060 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
Sunkai 2312 Bush 2060 Director 3006 3064
Superscan 2196 Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039, Eastern 3025 Quasar 3040
Supervision 2305 2040, 2041, 2042 Everquest 3041 RadioShack 3041, 3045
Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189, Philips 2061, 2062 Fidelity 3048 RCA 3005, 3036, 3076,
2196, 2219, 2224 Pioneer 2063, 2064, 2065, Filmnet 3057 3077
Symphonic 2062, 2180 2066, 2067 Filmnet Cablecrypt Realistic 3020
Synn 2305 RCA 2059 3061 Recoton 3044
T.D.E. Systems 2316 Samsung 2035 Filmnet Comcrypt Regal 3028
Tatung 2083, 2312 Yamaha 2036 3061 Regency 3025
TCM 2228, 2379 Finlux 3051 Rembrandt 3016
Teac 2199, 2287, 2301, DVD Recorder Focus 3044 Runco 3040
2305 Aspire 2140 Foxtel 3068 Sagem 3055
Tec 2310 Astar 2162 France Telecom 3054, 3055 Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032,
Technics 2197 Broksonic 2192 Freebox 3069 3042
Technika 2312, 2317 Go Video 2135 GC Electronics 3020 SAT 3048
Telefunken 2307 Hitachi 2108 GE 3015, 3016 Scientific Atlanta 3003, 3004, 3011,
Tensai 2312 Insignia 2080 GEC 3059 3012, 3013, 3062,
Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311 Irradio 2103 Gemini 3026, 3041 3078, 3079, 3080,
Theta Digital 2207 JVC 2054, 2055, 2056, General Instrument 3081, 3082, 3083,
Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284, 2057 3006, 3008, 3016, 3084
2294 LG 2107, 2115, 2141, 3039, 3050, 3067, Signal 3026, 3041
Tokai 2302, 2310 2188 3075 Signature 3016
Top Suxess 2318 Liteon 2121 Goldstar 3042 Sony 3014, 3047
Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027, Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039, Gooding 3049 Sprucer 3036
2028, 2029, 2030, 2041, 2042, 2043, Grundig 3048, 3049 Standard Component
2098, 2099, 2100, 2089, 2104, 2108, Hamlin 3027, 3028 3033
2101, 2114, 2117, 2112 Hirschmann 3051 Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041,
2118, 2119, 2136, Philips 2090, 2096, 2097, Hitachi 3016 3067
2187, 2195, 2205, 2126, 2193 HomeChoice 3056 Stargate 3026, 3041
2291, 2337, 2338, Pioneer 2067, 2113 Humax 3001, 3002, 3071 Starquest 3026, 3041
2378 Pye 2194 ITT Nokia 3051 Supercable 3008
TRANScontinents Samsung 2034, 2082, 2138 Jasco 3041 Supermax 3045
2313, 2317 Sansui 2027 Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016, Tele+1 3057, 3061
Transonic 2317 Sanyo 2139 3026, 3037, 3041, Telepiu 3057
Trio 2312 Sony 2022, 2023, 2024, 3050, 3064, 3067, Thomson 3000, 3009
Trutech 2160 2085, 2086, 2087, 3075 TIME WARNER 3006
TruVision 2309 2102, 2128, 2129, JVC 3049 Tocom 3017
TSM 2318 2130 Kabel Deutschland Torx 3067
Umax 2315 Sylvania 2189 3043, 3073, 3074 Toshiba 3040
United 2317 Toshiba 2030, 2099, 2100, Macab 3055 Tristar 3045
Urban Concepts 2205 2101, 2114, 2117, Magnavox 3029 Tudi 3052
US Logic 2167 2118, 2119 Maspro 3049 Tusa 3026, 3041
Venturer 2199 Yamaha 2106 Matsui 3049 TV86 3031
Viewmaster 2318 MegaCable 3039 Unika 3019, 3020
Vocopro 2156 Cable Memorex 3030, 3040 United Cable 3037, 3064
VocoStar 2157 ABC 3004, 3015, 3016, Minerva 3049 Universal 3019, 3020
Waitec 2318 3017, 3037, 3040, Mnet 3057 Universum 3049, 3051
Welltech 2300 3067, 3080, 3081 Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010, V2 3045
Westinghouse 2109, 2168 ADB 3070 3013, 3039, 3072, Videoway 3065
Wharfedale 2304, 2305 Adelphia 3003 3075 View Star 3024, 3029, 3031

ix
Viewmaster 3045 Condor 4074, 4090, 4137 Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090, Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090,
Vision 3045 Connexions 4074, 4092 4092, 4093, 4101, 4100, 4133, 4134,
Visiopass 3051, 3054, 3055 Conrad 4074, 4133, 4136, 4133 4137
Vortex View 3045 4137 Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090, Lasonic 4062
Wittenberg 3048 Conrad Electronic 4137, 4139 4091, 4096, 4098, Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099,
Zenith 3035, 3040, 3046 Contec 4096 4133, 4140 4133, 4137, 4139
Zentek 3044 Coolsat 4050 GE 4015, 4016, 4061, Leng 4095
Cosat 4098 4151 Lennox 4098
Sattelite Coship 4063 General Instrument Lenson 4136
AB Sat 4138, 4139 Crown 4089 4027, 4065 Lexus 4103
AccessHD 4058 Daeryung 4092 GMI 4089 LG 4053, 4057, 4099
ADB 4142 Daewoo 4107, 4139 GOI 4039 Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134,
AGS 4138 DDC 4085 Goldbox 4135 4139
Akai 4101, 4103 Delega 4085 GoldStar 4099 Lifetec 4090
Alba 4083, 4084, 4085, Dew 4096 Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084 Lorenzen 4137
4086, 4108, 4139 Diamond 4097 Goodmind 4061 Lorraine 4099
Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088 Digiality 4137 Grandin 4077 Lupus 4074, 4090
Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103 Digital Stream 4059 Grothusen 4083, 4099 Luxor 4136
Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090 DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020, Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093, Lyonnaise 4102
Alltech 4139 4021, 4022, 4024, 4113, 4129, 4136, Macab 4102
Alpha 4103 4037, 4038, 4040, 4140 Magnavox 4045, 4055
Alpha Digital 4058 4041, 4043, 4045, Hänsel & Gretel 4137 Manata 4077, 4138, 4139
Alphastar 4031 4057, 4106, 4143, Hantor 4083, 4095 Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098,
Amitronica 4139 4144, 4145, 4146, Hanuri 4088 4138
Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136, 4147, 4148, 4149, Hauppauge 4126 Marantz 4101
4139 4150, 4151, 4152, Heliocom 4137 Mascom 4088
Anglo 4139 4153, 4154, 4155, Helium 4137 Maspro 4084, 4139
Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090, 4156, 4157 Hinari 4085 Matsui 4138
4139 Discoverer 4134 Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128, Max 4137
Anttron 4083, 4086 Discovery 4138 4136, 4137, 4138 Mediabox 4135
Apollo 4083 Diseqc 4138 Hisawa 4095 Mediamarkt 4089
Armstrong 4089, 4103 Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013, Hisense 4066 Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136
Artec 4054 4014, 4019, 4039, Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149, Medion 4074, 4090, 4139
Asat 4101, 4103 4064 4153 Medison 4139
ASLF 4139 Dishpro 4039, 4064 Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007 Mega 4101, 4103
Astacom 4138 Distrisat 4103 Houston 4098 Memorex 4045
Astra 4089, 4091, 4100, Ditristrad 4098 HTS 4039 Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083,
4137, 4139 DNT 4092, 4101, 4103 Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144, 4086, 4087, 4088,
Astro 4074, 4086, 4088, Drake 4026 4146, 4150, 4152 4139
4090, 4093, 4135, DStv 4140 Hughes Network Systems Metz 4093
4136, 4137 Dune 4074 4021 Micro electronic 4136, 4137, 4139
AudioTon 4086, 4098 Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039, Humax 4051, 4075, 4076, Micro Technology 4139
Aurora 4140 4064, 4092, 4139 4110 MicroGem 4056
Austar 4140 Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089, Huth 4087, 4089, 4094, Micromaxx 4074, 4090
Axiel 4138 4136, 4139 4095, 4096, 4098, Microstar 4090
Axis 4074, 4090, 4091, Elap 4138, 4139 4137, 4141 Microtec 4139
4096 Elekta 4088 Hypson 4077 Minerva 4093
Best 4074, 4090 Elsat 4139 Ilo 4066 Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152
Blaupunkt 4093 Elta 4074, 4083, 4090, Imex 4077 Mitsumi 4100
Blue Sky 4139 4098, 4101, 4103 Innovation 4090 Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101,
Boca 4089, 4100, 4105, Emanon 4083 Insignia 4057 4103, 4139
4139 Emme Esse 4074, 4090 Intertronic 4089 Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010,
Boston 4138 Engel 4139 Intervision 4098, 4137 4065
Brain Wave 4095 Ep Sat 4084 ITT Nokia 4084 Multichoice 4140
Broadcast 4094 EURIEULT 4077 Jerrold 4065 Multitec 4134
Broco 4139 Eurodec 4102 Johansson 4095 Muratto 4099
BSkyB 4113, 4123 Europa 4103, 4136, 4137 JOK 4138 Mysat 4139
BT 4138 Europhon 4137 JSR 4098 Navex 4095
Bubu Sat 4139 Eurosat 4089 JVC 4011, 4019, 4039, Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136,
Bush 4084, 4127 Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090, 4079 4137, 4139
Cambridge 4136 4133, 4136, 4137 Kamm 4139 Neusat 4139
Canal Satellite 4135 Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137 Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103, Next Level 4065
Canal+ 4135 Eutelsat 4139 4109, 4112, 4120, NextWave 4141
CaptiveWorks 4049 Exator 4083, 4086 4133, 4138, 4139 Nikko 4089, 4139
Channel Master 4060, 4085 Expressvu 4039 Kathrein Eurostar 4133 Nokia 4084, 4122
Chaparral 4025 Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139 Klap 4138 Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085,
CHEROKEE 4138 Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132 Konig 4137 4088, 4102
Chess 4134, 4139 Fidelity 4136 Kosmos 4099 Nova 4140
CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137 Finlandia 4084 KR 4086 Novis 4095
Clatronic 4095 Finlux 4084 Kreiselmeyer 4093 Oceanic 4097
CNT 4088 FinnSat 4096, 4102 K-SAT 4139 Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096
Comag 4000, 4001, 4002, Flair Mate 4139 Kyostar 4083 Okano 4089
4003, 4004 Foxtel 4140 L&S Electronic 4074 Optex 4098
Commlink 4087 Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136 Optus 4135, 4140, 4141
Comtech 4096 FTEmaximal 4074, 4139

x
Orbitech 4083, 4134, 4135, Satcom 4094, 4137 Tivax 4058
4136 Satec 4139 Tivo 4150
OSat 4086 Satelco 4074 Tokai 4103
Otto Versand 4093 Satford 4094 Tonna 4084, 4094, 4098,
Pace 4084, 4093, 4113, Satmaster 4094 4136, 4139
4121, 4125, 4138 Satplus 4134 Toshiba 4144, 4152, 4153
Pacific 4097 Schneider 4090, 4134, 4138 Triad 4099
Packsat 4138 Schwaiger 4097, 4134, 4137 Triasat 4136
Palcom 4085 SCS 4133 Triax 4093, 4133, 4136,
Palladium 4089, 4136 Seemann 4089, 4091, 4092 4139
Palsat 4134, 4136 SEG 4074, 4083, 4090, Turnsat 4139
Panasat 4140 4095 Tvonics 4132
Panasonic 4043, 4044, 4046, Seleco 4098 Twinner 4077, 4139
4084, 4113, 4118, Servi Sat 4077, 4139 UEC 4140
4143, 4148 Siemens 4093 Uher 4134
Panda 4084, 4137 Silva 4099 UltimateTV 4020
Pansat 4047 Skantin 4139 Uniden 4029, 4045
Patriot 4138 Skardin 4091 Unisat 4089, 4096, 4103
Paysat 4045 Skinsat 4136 Unitor 4095
PCT 4060 SKR 4139 Universum 4093, 4133, 4137
Philco 4055 Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087, US Digital 4066
Philips 4021, 4022, 4045, 4134, 4139 Variosat 4093
4084, 4101, 4103, Skymax 4101, 4103 Vega 4074
4111, 4115, 4135, SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137, Ventana 4101, 4103
4138, 4150, 4152, 4139 Viewsat 4048
4153, 4155, 4156 Skyvision 4098 Visiosat 4095, 4098, 4138,
Phoenix 4096 SM Electronic 4134, 4139 4139
Phonotrend 4084, 4087, 4098 Smart 4133, 4139 Voom 4065
Pioneer 4124, 4135 Sony 4017, 4020, 4135 Vortec 4083
Polsat 4102 SR 4089, 4100 Welltech 4134
Predki 4095 Star Choice 4065 WeTeKom 4134, 4136
Premiere 4098, 4135 Starland 4139 Wevasat 4084
Priesner 4089 Starring 4095 Wewa 4084
Primestar 4030 Start Trak 4083 Winersat 4095
Profile 4138 Strong 4074, 4083, 4086, Wisi 4084, 4092, 4093,
Promax 4084 4090, 4099, 4140 4136, 4137
Prosat 4085, 4087 STS 4033 Woorisat 4088
Proscan 4015, 4016, 4040, STVI 4077 Worldsat 4138
4151 Sumida 4089 Xrypton 4074
Protek 4097 Sunny Sound 4074 XSat 4139
Proton 4066 Sunsat 4139 Zehnder 4074, 4088, 4090,
Provision 4088 Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100 4131, 4133
Quadral 4074, 4085, 4087, Supermax 4141 Zenith 4052, 4057, 4145
4090, 4138 Tandberg 4102 Zodiac 4086
Quelle 4093, 4133, 4137 Tandy 4086
Quiero 4102 Tantec 4084 CD
RadioShack 4065 TCM 4090 Yamaha 5000, 5013
Radiola 4101, 4103 Techniland 4094
Radix 4092, 4119 TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073, CD Recoder
Rainbow 4086 4092, 4103, 4116, Yamaha 5001
RCA 4015, 4016, 4034, 4117, 4134, 4135,
4035, 4036, 4037, 4136 MD
4038, 4040, 4151, Technology 4140 Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004
4157 Technosat 4141
Realistic 4028 Technowelt 4137 Tape
Redpoint 4091 Teco 4089, 4100 Yamaha 5005, 5006
Redstar 4074, 4090 Telanor 4085
RFT 4087, 4101, 4103 Telasat 4133, 4137 Tuner
Roadstar 4139 Telecom 4139 Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,
Roch 4077 Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138 5010, 5014, 5015,
Rover 4074, 4139 Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092, 5016, 5017, 5018
Saba 4088, 4133, 4137, 4136, 4137
4138 Telemaster 4088 USB
Sabre 4084 Telesat 4137 Yamaha 5012, 5021
Sagem 4069, 4102 Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136
Sakura 4096 Televes 4084, 4136 DOCK
Samsung 4018, 4021, 4023, Telewire 4098 Yamaha 5011, 5022
4041, 4042, 4081, Tempo 4141
4082, 4083, 4114, Tevion 4090, 4139 LD
4150, 4154 Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102, Yamaha 2002
SAT 4085, 4136 4104, 4130, 4133,
Sat Cruiser 4141 4135, 4137, 4138,
Sat Partner 4083, 4086, 4088, 4139
4095, 4099, 4136 Thorens 4097
Sat Team 4139 Thorn 4084

xi
00_RX-V2065_U_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 24, 2009 4:10 PM

RX-V2065
RX-V2065
AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL
© 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WS30700

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI